JP2018183694A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in player's interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes: lottery means for holding a lottery result from among a plurality of kinds of lottery results at least including an advantageous game having a different degree of losing and advantage, based on passage of a game medium shot toward a game area 1100 through predetermined areas (a first start pocket 2101, a second start pocket 2102); and performance display means (liquid crystal display device 1900) capable of displaying a performance, based on a lottery result by the lottery means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 184

Description

  The present invention includes a so-called ball-type game machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko game machine” or “pachinko machine”), a revolving-type game machine (generally also referred to as “pachislot machine”, “slot machine”), etc. It relates to gaming machines.

  In a general conventional pachinko machine, a lottery for winning a big hit is performed based on a game medium launched in a game area passing or entering a starting port provided in the game area. And in such a pachinko gaming machine, an effect based on the lottery result is executed on the liquid crystal display device or the like as one of the devices for making the player win the winning result of the big hit. For example, by preparing multiple types of effects including a high-reliability effect that is relatively easy to execute in the case of a big hit and a low-reliability effect that is relatively easy to execute in the case of a loss, a high-reliability effect can be achieved. When it appears, it is possible to increase the player's expectation (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-188078 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, when a low-reliability effect is produced, there is a strong possibility that the interest of the player will be lowered because the impression that it is out of the big hit is strong.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of a player in order to solve the above-described problems.

  In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is based on the fact that a plurality of types of lottery results including at least advantageous games with different degrees of merging and advantages based on the fact that game media launched toward the game region have passed through the predetermined region. A lottery means for drawing one of the lottery results, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the lottery of the advantageous game despite the fact that the lottery means has been drawn Based on the fact that a specific effect has appeared on the effect display means when the result is not obtained, an effect storage means capable of storing that the specific effect has appeared, and an effect storage means An information teaching unit that teaches information related to the stored specific effect and a special effect that is longer than the specific effect can be displayed when the storage by the effect storage unit is performed. A special effect control means capable of causing the special effect to appear in a form including the specific effect even if the moving time is selected, and the special effect control means includes the special effect within the display period of the special effect. Between the specific effect executing means for causing the specific effect to appear on the effect display means and the specific effect displayed by the specific effect executing means, the related effect related to the specific effect is displayed. An interruption effect executing means for causing the display means to appear, and further, the special effect control means can cause the specific effect to appear, so that when the memory by the effect storage means is being performed, A high-order reward expectation means capable of increasing the expectation that the advantageous game to be transferred is the advantageous game with a high degree of advantage when a specific performance is displayed and the advantageous game is shifted to the advantageous game; It is a technique machine.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the lottery means wins an advantageous game with a high degree of advantage when the storage by the effect storage means is performed, the special effect is displayed within the display period. Since the specific performance can be performed and the related performance can be executed in the meantime, the specific performance appears when the storage by the effect storage means is performed. In the case of shifting to an advantageous game, it can be expected that the advantageous game to be transferred has an effect of increasing the expectation that it is the advantageous game having the high degree of advantage, and suppresses a decrease in the interest of the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can suppress the fall of a player's interest is provided.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front structural member of embodiment different from examples, such as FIG. 103, and was seen from the front. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. 106. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in the attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which cut and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center actor from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center actor from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center actor from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right middle production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right middle production | presentation unit and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled 2nd embodiment of the fixed decoration body in a front right middle production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed decoration body of FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front cover and production sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the position slightly left with respect to the front, (C) is the perspective view seen from the position further left than (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the production | presentation sheet in the fixed decoration body of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light extinction, (c) shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of blue lighting. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side direction production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side direction production unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side direction production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit of the back side direction production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side direction production unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle production unit of the center role in the front unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle production unit in the normal position, and (b) is a front view with the front right movable decorative body in the appearance position. It is the perspective view seen from the slightly upper direction. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side effect unit in the back unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back top production unit and the back bottom production unit in the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is explanatory drawing which simplifies and shows the normal state which faces from the window part of a center accessory, (b) makes a back right production | presentation unit and a back left production | presentation unit appear while rotating a rotation decoration body, and is liquid crystal It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which divides the display screen of a display means into three, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotation decoration body following (b). FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six parts in relation to the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit unlike FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect made to appear by making the rotation position of a rotation decoration body differ before making a back right effect unit and a back left effect unit appear. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a decoration design change start process. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the determination result in special symbol fluctuation patterns, and production time. It is a figure (sorting table 1A) for demonstrating distribution of the production | presentation pattern containing a winning production. It is the figure which put together the reliability at the time of each winning effect appearing using the distribution table 1A. It is a figure (distribution table 1B) for demonstrating distribution of the production pattern containing a winning production. It is the figure which put together the reliability at the time of each winning effect appearing using the distribution table 1B. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when a normal type winning effect is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the SP1 type winning effect is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the SP2 type winning effect is performed. It is a figure (distribution table 2A) for demonstrating distribution of the production pattern containing a winning production. It is a figure (distribution table 2B) for demonstrating distribution of the production pattern containing a winning production. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the alternative effect by a 1st effect pattern is performed. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the alternative effect by a 1st effect pattern is performed. It is another figure (the 1) for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the alternative effect by a 1st effect pattern is performed. It is another figure (the 2) for demonstrating the transition of an effect image when the alternative effect by a 1st effect pattern is performed. It is a time chart for demonstrating the alternative production | presentation by a 1st production pattern. It is a time chart for demonstrating the alternative production | presentation by a 2nd production pattern. It is a time chart for demonstrating the alternative production by the 3rd production pattern. It is a time chart for demonstrating the alternative production by the 4th production pattern. It is the concrete effect image (the 1) in a liquid crystal display device when a continuous defeat effect is performed. It is a concrete effect image (the 2) in a liquid crystal display device when a continuous defeat effect is performed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can see inside the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. While being able to hold the pachinko machine 1 easily as a finger hook, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. Although the details will be described later, the support protrusion 20b when viewed from the front. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view shown.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the door frame base main body 110.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, rental unit 360, as electrical equipment, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is simply bent partially as the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bent projecting pieces 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking protrusion 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, a side diffusing lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkle-like portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. The side inner lens 212 cooperates with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side to glitter the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. In this example, the LEDs 214c on the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. The side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-like front surface as in the side inner lens 212, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the crest-like projecting portion of the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit with a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 also includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate that can transmit sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side lower decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration frame 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially centering on the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the emission lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  The upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can make the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 have a light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in the door frame.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (axial support side) in front view and bulges forward. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish main body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. Thus, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side and looks like a feeling of distance.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the pan unit 300. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later, so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334, and the lower dish side cover 330, the lower dish lower left cover 334, Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. And an upper dish ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit base 310, and an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move backward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a round front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the base member 420. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c that protrudes outward at the lower end. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the stepped portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other. When the dial is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper tray 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51B is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the back. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 which is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body rear 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, if the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and a game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotational drive can be stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch control unit 4120 Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to game ball driving defects. Thereby making it possible.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right in front view toward the front end of 542, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, A second sphere inlet 542c that communicates with the second sphere passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example uses the first ball outlet to pass the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a. From 544a, the plate unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, the tray unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161), and the game A notification for urging a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside is provided.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 57A is a plan view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57B is a front view of the tamper-proof member, and FIG. 57C is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 is formed. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and is on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the upper end portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting part 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece part 588b and the upper side of the lower piece part 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the game ball I hit, and the wire Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the path of the game ball It moves along the route connecting with the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction of narrowing the gap (leftward in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal action is performed on the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw in the game area 605. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 only by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, thereby the door frame. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at a substantially vertical center. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. It has become.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward larger than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 include peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side as viewed from the front is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to light-decorate the upper dish 301. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 toward the rear. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 which is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 which protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall portion 604 is opened. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball which has been paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. The payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the dispensing rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the dispensing motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are dispensed to the ball extraction passage 741d, and the dispensing rotator 748 is disposed. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, a substrate unit. It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The insides of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical end at the tip, and the other end (lower end) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation or disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper left rear surface in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in the rear right end rear surface. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be reliably prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 108). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, or the like. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist the same effect as the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper frame 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side of the tank frame unit 740 and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of Since the transparent back cover 900 is arranged substantially in the same plane as the surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine that can visually recognize the rear side and the rear side surface and can easily check (visually check) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4 Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is the game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board as viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player side. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of this example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protrusion 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The gaming panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Accordingly, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a reserved number related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by a game ball that is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbol on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 162). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, the details of which will be described later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 155, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227 It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and is opened downward at the lower end side. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state of holding the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose positions such as obstacle nails and winning holes are changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 are the same as the embodiment of FIGS. 103 to 105 in that the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the same. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 103 to 105, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet. It is formed in a straight line inclined so that the distance to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. It can be done.

  In the example of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it attach the game panel 1150 which consists of one board as shown to 101. FIG.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state in which the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Next, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are used. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. In addition, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded view of the main members constituting the game board and obliquely viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 A plate-like game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

  The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a rear side of the back unit 3000 from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the board.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example includes an attacker unit 2100 arranged to extend in the lower part in the game area 1100 from right above the out port 1151 to the right in front view, and a pachinko machine on the right front surface of the attacker unit 2100. A function display unit 1180 that is attached to a position that can be visually recognized from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the player frame 1, and an inner periphery of the gaming area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 And a front side unit 2200 arranged along the center of the game area 1100 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010, a back side effect unit 3100 arranged over the upper side and both left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, a back side effect unit 3300 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, And a lower back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 will be described in detail later. A box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 for accommodating an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

  The gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a gaming area 1100 is divided into left and right by a center accessory 2500 attached to the gaming panel 1150. Between the inner periphery of the region 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A), the width is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the game region 1100 Between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front constituent member 1110A), the game ball 1150 is a wide area where the game balls can be sufficiently distributed. In the game area 1100, the game panel 1150 is located in the left and lower areas of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of obstruction nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined level or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The guide ball member 2142 flows down and is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 to be discharged downward from directly above the gate portion 2105, so that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability. Yes. In other words, the game ball can easily enter the gate portion 2105 by performing a so-called right hit.

  Although details will be described later, in this example, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the normal lottery result is drawn and executed in a very short time. Therefore, if the result of the normal lottery is “winning”, the movable piece 2106 moves backward to accept the game ball to the second start port 2102, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 enters the second start port 2102. It is designed to win a prize. When the normal lottery is “losing”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the big winning opening 2103. Therefore, a game that directly targets the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be performed by making a right strike.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed), the game ball is guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 or the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of planted obstacle nails, A game ball can be awarded to the general winning port 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning port 2104, and the like. Further, when a game ball enters the warp inlet 2504 that is guided to the warp inlet 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, and the stage The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement due to the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be awarded with a high probability.

  As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the right and left sides of the center accessory 2500 can be played with different impressions, and it is difficult to get bored by providing various games. Can be done.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged so as to extend from right above the out port 1151 to the right side at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the attacker unit 2100. , A function display unit 1180 attached to the front right end surface in front view, a front side unit 2200 disposed on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is arranged on the right side of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

  The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, pays out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting game balls and receives a first special opening lot 2101 and a second to draw a predetermined special lottery result upon acceptance. A start opening 2102, a game ball can be received according to the result of the special lottery, and a large winning opening 2103 for receiving a game ball by receiving the game ball, and a predetermined number of game balls by receiving the game ball are received. A general payout opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate unit 2105 from which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn in response to the passage of the game ball are provided.

  The first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 in this example are always capable of receiving game balls. Further, the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings that can be changed between a state where a game ball can be received and a state where the game ball cannot be received. The second starting port 2102 can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2105, and the big winning port 2103 is the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. It is possible to accept according to a special lottery result that is drawn in response to the acceptance of game balls.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged on the axis line (directly above the out port 1151) passing through the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500. Further, the second start port 2102 is arranged on the lower right side in front view than the first start port 2101. Further, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged below the second starting port 2102 and on the right side in front of the first starting port 2101 so that the left end is substantially directly below the second starting port 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first start opening 2101. Further, the gate portion 2105 is disposed right above the second starting port 2102 on the upper right side in front view from the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, includes three general winning holes 2201 arranged on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100 and an upper left side of the general winning hole 2201 in front of the game. A shelf 2202 capable of guiding a game ball that has flowed down the left side when viewed from the front of the center accessory 2500 in the area 1100 is provided.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 includes a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, a peripheral wall portion 2503 that prevents a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame, A warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position on the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that has been released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction. And a stage 2510 that is later discharged into the game area 1100 and refluxed.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball recirculated and released from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 has a high probability. The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be received.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 130. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear after being broken down as the main member. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front after disassembling the second unit, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear after exploded. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit cut away.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150 and then placed on the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2101 that is arranged immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1150 and is capable of receiving game balls at all times, and a position slightly on the right side and slightly below the first start port 2101 A second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 130) arranged at the top, a big winning port 2103 arranged below the second starting port 2102 and on the right side of the first starting port 2101 in front view, and the first starting port 2101 And a general winning port 2104 disposed slightly above the first starting port 2101.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 includes a gate unit 2105 for drawing a normal lottery result in response to the passing of a game ball. The gate portion 2105 is arranged on the right side and slightly above the general winning opening 2104 and slightly above the second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 130).

  As shown in the figure, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. The second start port 2102 has a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 that is open upward with a width that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball and that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the opened opening. I have. The second starting port 2102 is configured to be unable to receive a game ball when the movable piece 2106 moves forward, and to be able to receive a game ball when the movable piece 2106 moves backward. Yes.

  In addition, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that is 4-6 times longer than the diameter of the game ball in the front view and is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction, and faces forward. And a plate-like opening / closing member 2107 that can open and close the opened opening. In this special winning opening 2103, the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening / closing member 2107 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball cannot be received and the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. When the state is reached, the game ball can be received, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

  Further, the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, like the first start port 2101, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. ing. Further, the gate unit 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that the game ball can flow in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker unit 2100 according to this embodiment will be described in further detail. The attacker unit 2100 includes a first unit 2110 having a first start port 2101 and a big prize opening 2103, a second start port 2102 and a gate portion 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which a function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit. The unit base 2150 that supports 2140 from the rear side, the attacker solenoid 2113, the start port solenoid 2124, the count sensor 2114, and the second start port sensor 2125 that are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150 are connected to the panel relay board 3025. Relay to relay And mosquitoes unit relay board 2160, and a.

  The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plate-like first base 2111 that has a first start opening 2101 and an opening 2111a that faces the prize winning opening 2103 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a first base 2111. A box-shaped first that is attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so that the grand prize opening 2103 faces from the opening of the box and that has the big prize opening 2103 and rotatably supports an opening / closing member 2107 that opens and closes the big prize opening 2103. A case 2112, an attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for driving the opening / closing member 2107 to open and close, and a count sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball supported in the first case 2112 and received in the big prize opening 2103. And a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface disposed on the rear side of the first case 2112 Is provided with a winning hole decorative substrate 2115, the.

  The first unit 2110 includes a middle object detection sensor 2116 attached to the lower side of the first start port 2101 on the front surface of the first base 2111 and a front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the medium induction decoration member 2117 attached and having a predetermined decoration, and mounted on the rear side of the first base 2111 at positions corresponding to the medium object detection sensor 2116 and the medium induction decoration member 2117. And an attacker inner decoration board 2118. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

  The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first start port 2101 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and that is open upward and rearward. When attached to the game panel 1150, the game panel 1150 extends to a position substantially coincident with the rear surface. As a result, the game ball received in the first start port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with the front side opened, and is divided into an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b. In addition, the first case 2112 includes a discharge port member 2112c that receives the game ball detected by the count sensor 2114 from the predetermined position and is received in the big winning opening 2103. The first case 2112 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and guides light from the big prize opening decoration board 2115 arranged on the rear side to the opening / closing member 2107 side to open or close the big prize opening 2103. The member 2107 can be decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves forward and backward. The attacker solenoid 2113 can rotate the opening / closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves forward and backward by energization. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 includes a spring that biases the plunger forward (protrudes), and the opening / closing member 2107 closes the big prize opening 2103 while the plunger is advanced. It comes to be a position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger is retracted (immersed), and the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from the closed position to the open position so that the game ball can be received in the big prize opening 2103. It has become.

  Although not shown in detail, the middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves in the vertical direction rather than the object moving in the left-right direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect.

  The middle guiding decorative member 2117 of the first unit 2110 has a front surface decorated with a downward arrow in a circle, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. A cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2117a is provided. Accordingly, the inner decoration board 2118 disposed on the rear side of the middle guiding decoration member 2117 can be decorated with light emission in a different manner between the inner side and the outer side of the arrow.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a plate-like second base 2121 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a front side of the gaming panel 1150 attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 (in the gaming area 1100). A passage forming member 2122 that protrudes toward the second forming the second starting port 2102 and the gate portion 2105 and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opens and closes the second starting port 2102 are slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a start-up solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 for driving the movable piece 2106 to open and close are provided.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a second start port sensor 2125 for detecting a game ball supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and received by the second start port 2102; A second sensor that is supported by the second case 2123 and the second case 2123 that detects a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105, and a second starter that is disposed on the rear side of the second base 2121 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It includes a mouth decoration board 2127, and a light shielding member 2128 having a plurality of openings disposed between the second start opening decoration board 2127 and the second base 2121 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The second unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 constitutes a part of a function display board 1191 in which a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs is mounted on the front surface at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121. A normal symbol display board 1191a is attached.

  The second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 has a substantially entire front surface formed in a flat surface shape along the surface of the game panel 1150, and game balls can circulate on the front side in cooperation with the passage forming member 2122. It is possible to form a simple passage. The second base 2121 includes a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass in the lower left corner when viewed from the front, and a recess 2121b recessed in a curved shape near the upper right corner when viewed from the front. . Further, although the detailed illustration of the second base 2121 is omitted, an opening through which the plate-like movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support portion 2121b for supporting the second start port sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, A board support 2121d that supports the symbol display board 1191a, a wall 2121e that extends forward from the right end of the board support 2121d when viewed from the front and covers the right side of the normal symbol display 1189, and the like. Note that the second base 2121 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The second base 2121 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  As shown in the drawing, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 is formed in an anti-L shape with a front-view shape having a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending leftward from the lower end thereof. Has been. The passage forming member 2122 includes a first passage 2122a that allows a game ball to flow in the vertical direction at a position of a portion extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and has an upper end and a lower end opened. The passage forming member 2122 allows the game ball to flow in the left-right direction at a position extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the right end side opens upward at a position substantially opposite to the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. A second passage 2122b whose left end is closed is provided. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are spaced apart in the vertical direction by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The passage forming member 2122 includes a plate-like wall portion 2122c that connects the lower end of the right side wall of the first passage 2122a and the right end of the right end opening of the second passage 2122b, and the first upper portion of the wall portion 2122c. A right outlet 2122d that opens to the right side surface of the passage 2122a in front view and through which a game ball can pass; a right shelf 2122e that extends short from the lower end of the right outlet 2122d toward the right side in front view; A left discharge part 2122f that is formed on the opposite side across the first passage 2122a from the lower end on the left side of the first passage 2122a and the upper end of the second passage 2122b and through which the game ball can pass, A left shelf portion 2122g which is continuous with the lower end of the second passage 2122f and is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and which is inclined to the left when viewed from the front, and in the first passage 2122a And a, a guide wall 2122h projecting rearwardly from the front wall at a height position definitive right outlet 2122d are formed.

  In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122 a is a gate portion 2105, and the right end opening of the second passage 2122 b is a second starting port 2102. The passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the first passage 2122a and above the right discharge port 2122d, and flows through the first passage 2122a. The game ball being played can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

  Further, the passage forming member 2122 is formed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 2106 in which the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b is moved forward and backward from the front surface of the second base 2121 in the assembled state as the second unit 2120. The right end opening is a second start port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the second start port sensor 2125 at a position substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the second passage 2122b, and circulates through the second passage 2122b (that is, The game ball that has passed through the second start port 2102 can be detected by the second start port sensor 2125.

  In addition, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the normal symbol display board 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a portion below the right shelf 2122e.

  The second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 has a bottom wall positioned directly below the right end opening when viewed from the front, and is formed in an arc shape so that the game ball passing through the right end opening (second start port 2102) can be smoothly passed. Can be distributed in the left direction. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a in the passage forming member 2122 is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b in the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to become lower toward the rear. The game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

  The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with the front side open, and can be divided into an upper case 2123a and a lower case 2123b. The upper case 2123a and the lower case 2123b The movable piece 2106 can be slidably supported in the front-rear direction. In addition to the movable piece 2106 and the start port solenoid 2124, the second case 2123 includes a link member 2129 that transmits the movement of the plunger that advances and retreats in the vertical direction of the start port solenoid 2124 to move the movable piece 2106 back and forth. Supporting inside.

  The start port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger moves forward and backward, and the plunger protrudes downward in a normal state (when not energized). In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 protrudes forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger in the start port solenoid 2124, and the second start port 2102. The game ball is prevented from being accepted. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger tip rises so as to be immersed, and the movable piece 2106 is moved rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the plunger tip. It will move backward, and it will be in the state which can accept the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2102 here.

  The second unit 2120 includes a plurality of rectangular openings 2128 a arranged in the left-right direction on the light shielding member 2128, and each opening 2128 a of the light shielding member 2128 is provided on the front surface of the second start port decoration board 2127. LEDs are mounted so as to correspond to each other, and each of the openings 2128a can be decorated with light emission.

  When the game ball enters the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), the second unit 2120 passes through the gate sensor 2126 and is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guide wall 2122h inclined backward. After being once sent into 2121b, it returns again from the inside of the recess 2121b into the first passage 2122a and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the game ball meanders by the guide wall 2122h and the concave portion 2121b, and the flow velocity of the game ball is attenuated so that the movable piece 2106 and the second passage arranged on the downstream side are attenuated. It is possible to reduce the impact applied when contacting 2122a.

  In this example, the passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn. . If the selected lottery result is a win, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front surface of the second base 2121 by driving the start opening solenoid 2124, the second start opening 2102 is opened, and a game ball can be received. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a enters the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b circulates in the left direction when viewed from the front by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and is detected by the second start port sensor 2125, and then rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b. The second unit 2120 is discharged (discharged) to the rear side (rear side of the game panel 1150) through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball until the movable piece 2106 is slid by driving the start port solenoid 2124 and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2102 is reached. If the normal lottery result is a win, the game ball that triggered the lottery is received at the second start port 2102 with a very high probability. It is like that. The start port solenoid 2124 is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second to 2 seconds) with respect to one hit, and when the predetermined time elapses, the start port solenoid 2124 is driven. When the driving is completed, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second start port 2102 is closed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the normal lottery is lost, the start opening solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains moving forward, and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is moved to the movable piece 2106. This prevents entry into the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball whose movement into the second starting port 2102 is blocked by the movable piece 2106 circulates from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf portion 2122g, and left It is discharged from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game panel 1150). Note that the movable piece 2106 is inclined such that the upper surface of the movable piece 2106 is lowered on the left side of the front, and even if the game ball stays on the movable piece 2106, the inclination of the game ball naturally rolls to the left in the front view. It is discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

  In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game ball may be released from the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a, and is released from the right discharge port 2122d. The game ball passes through the right shelf 2122e and is released into the game area 1100 from the right end of the right shelf 2122e.

  Further, the third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 has a general winning opening 2104 that can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 in front view. A third base 2131, a lens member 2132 that is inserted from the rear side into the through hole of the third base 2131, is attached to the third base 2131, and has translucency, and is disposed on the rear side of the lens member 2132. And a gate decoration substrate 2133 on which LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 is integrally formed with a general winning opening 2104 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and that is open upward and rearward. When attached to the panel 1150, it extends to a position substantially coincident with the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150. The third base 2131 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The gate decoration board 2133 of the third unit 2130 can make the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 be illuminated by the lens member 2132 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light appropriately. . The gate decoration substrate 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a plate-like fourth base 2141 to which the function display board 1191 is attached to the lower rear surface, and to the upper front surface of the fourth base 2141 and the game panel. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a that protrudes forward (inside the game area 1100) from the front surface of 1150 and guides a game ball in the left-right direction, and disposed below the guide passage 2142a in the guide passage member 2142. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and a right guide decoration member 2144 having a predetermined decoration attached to the guide passage member 2142 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. And.

  The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a triangular shape with a front view, and the hypotenuse on the left end has an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. The fourth base 2141 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2141a at the lower portion thereof, on which the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191 face each other. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side of the fourth base 2141 extending in the left-right direction. The right end of the front view opens upward, the left end opens downward, and the guide passage 2142a through which game balls can flow is distributed. It has. The guide passage 2142 a of the guide passage member 2142 is closed at the front side and opened at the rear side, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. In addition, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side when viewed from the front is lowered.

  In addition, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is in the assembled state so that the right end when viewed from the front is close to the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and flows down along the right inner periphery of the game area 1100. The game ball that has been moved enters the inside from the right end side opening. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward on the left end side when viewed from the front, and the left end opening opened downward in the assembled state as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed so as to be located immediately above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and the front surface corresponding to the guide passage 2142a in the fourth base 2141, protrusions extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the game balls are moved in the front-rear direction in the guide passage 2142a. The circulation speed can be attenuated by meandering to the right. The left end opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the left and right direction rather than the object that moves in the vertical direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect. The fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

  The right guide decorative member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 has a decoration in which a right-pointing arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface. On the rear side of the right guiding decorative member 2144, a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2146 is provided in which a wall along the decorative shape of the right guiding decorative member 2144 extends rearward. Thus, the back right lower decorative substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the right guide decorative member 2144 can be decorated with light emission in different manners on the inside and outside of the arrow.

  The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open. The unit base 2150 also includes a discharge port 2150a that receives the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 2121b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharges it from the rear surface of the unit base 2150 to the rear.

  In the state where the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged in the game area 1100, the first start port 2101 is located at the approximately center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1151 with the middle guide decoration member 2117 interposed therebetween. The special winning opening 2103 is positioned approximately at the center in the left-right direction between the first start opening 2101 and the right inner periphery in the game area 1100.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the first start port 2101 is located immediately above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. Thereby, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be received at the first start port 2101 with high probability. The game ball received in the first start port 2101 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guide passage 3071 of the back left guide member 3070 in the back unit 3000 described later. Yes.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be positioned on the right side of the prize winning opening 2103 when viewed from the front, and the right end portion (the right end portion of the function display unit 1180) is located on the right side in the game area 1100. It is located slightly inside (left side) from the circumference. Thereby, the game ball flowing down from above along the inner right side of the game area 1100 falls on the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 and opens upward on the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided to the left in the front view by the guide passage 2142a, and is released downward immediately above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, directly above the gate portion 2105. ing. The game ball released downward from the left end opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability.

  The game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided rearward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 disposed in the first passage 2122a, and the second The base 2121 enters the recess 2121b. Then, the game ball that has entered the recess 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121b and comes into contact with the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122 to flow downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game balls meander and flow down in the front-rear direction.

  In this example, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is immediately performed, and the selected lottery result is instantly displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. When the selected lottery result is a win, the start opening solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward so that a game ball can be received in the second start opening 2102. Accordingly, the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 are accepted into the second start port 2102 with a very high probability when the winning lottery is selected as a normal lottery result.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting port 2102 and is sent to the left in the front view and detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. The course is changed rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. .

  If the result of the normal lottery is lost, the game ball released downward from the first passage 2122a comes into contact with the movable piece 2106 that closes the second start port 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b. Is released from the left discharge port 2122f between the two to the left shelf 2122g on the upper side of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g in the left direction when viewed from the front, from the left end of the left shelf 2122g into the game area 1100 Is discharged to the upper region of the special winning opening 2103.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 receives the game balls received at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 according to a special lottery result (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit” , Etc.), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from the upright closed position by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113 to the open position that is substantially horizontal. The game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then discharged below the attacker unit 2100.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning port 2104 disposed between the first start port 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then a back unit described later. In 3000, the back right guide member 3060 is sent from the upper opening 3061 into the right guide passage.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and on the lower side from the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front).

  As shown in the drawing, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and is arranged substantially along the arc from the right end of the front view to the left. It mainly includes three general winning holes 2201 and a shelf 2202 that is disposed at the upper left of the three general winning holes 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The three general winning holes 2201 of the front side unit 2200 have a front end that extends forward from the front of the game panel 1150 and a rear end that extends rearward from the rear of the game panel 1150. The game area 1100 is formed so that a game ball can be received at any time.

  The shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the left inner periphery of the game area 1100, and has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. The game ball can be guided rightward.

  The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-like unit base 2210 having three general winning holes 2201, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, a guide member 2211 having a shelf 2202 formed at the upper end, and a left object detection sensor 2212 that is disposed on the right side of the guide member 2211 and on the lower side of the right end of the shelf 2202 and attached to the front of the unit base 2210 The left guide decoration member 2213 having a predetermined decoration attached to the guide member 2211 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212 and the front side of the unit base 2210 are opened. A shallow box-shaped transparent unit cover 2214.

  The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-like portion that contacts the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a frame-like shape that extends backward from the plate-like portion and is inserted into a corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150. And is attached to the game panel 1150 at a plate-like part. The unit base 2210 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface and is formed so as to be partially translucent.

  The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a shelf 2202 that is linearly inclined so that the right side is lower on the upper side. The guide member 2211 has a circular through hole into which the left guide decorative member 2213 is inserted at a substantially central position.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object positioned within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212 moves in the left-right direction rather than the object moving in the vertical direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect.

  The left guide decorative member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a front surface decorated with a left-pointing arrow arranged in a circle, and a wall along the outer periphery of the front decoration extends rearward. A cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2213a is provided. Note that the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a extends to a position slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the attached state. Accordingly, the LED on the back left lower decorative substrate 3020 in the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guide decorative member 2213 can be decorated with light emission in a manner different from the inside and the outside of the arrow.

  The unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and is formed with a depth such that the rear end is located slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the attached state. ing. This unit cover 2214 has a through-hole through which the light shielding member 2213a of the left guide decorative member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a faces rearward.

  The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the game ball that has flowed down the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2202 and is downstream of the shelf 2202. The game balls can be received by the three general winning ports 2201 arranged in the box. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guide member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guide passage. It is to be delivered.

[2-4. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the upper right front, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the lower left front, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the front right middle effect unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the front right middle effect unit of the center character as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit as seen from the rear.

  The center accessory 2500 in this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150 and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, there is a large window 2501 in which a liquid crystal display device 1900 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100 is visible. ing.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange portion 2502a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and swells forward from the unit base 2502 to approximately the center in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall 2503 that guides the game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 to the left and right as a boundary and prevents the game ball from entering the frame (inside the window 2501) is provided. Part of the peripheral wall 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has entered a warp inlet 2504 (see FIG. 112) that is open on the left outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and has entered the warp inlet 2504. A warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction and then is released into the game area 1100 above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window 2501.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and has a transparent plate-like partition wall member 2520 that closes the window portion 2501, and on the left side and lower side of the window portion 2501 on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503. A center lower decorative board 2521 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, a center upper decorative board 2522 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall 2503 above the window 2501, and a unit An upper flange member 2523 that is attached to the rear upper surface of the base 2502 in the front view and forms a part of the flange portion 2502a, and a left rear decoration member 2524 that is attached to the left side of the unit base 2502 in the front view and decorates the inside of the frame. It is equipped with.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the right side of the stage 2510 as viewed from the front, and holds the number of reserved special lottery results lottered by accepting game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and the gate unit 2105. A holding number display 2530 capable of displaying the number of holdings of a normal lottery result lottered by passing a game ball, and a holding number display 2530 are disposed and attached to the front side of the unit base 2502. A center decoration member 2540 for decorating the front surface and a decoration of a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 disposed on the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the upper side of the window portion 2501, and can be illuminated by the center decoration substrate 2522. Arranged on the front right side of the front stage production unit 2550 and the window portion 2501, depending on the gaming state (special lottery result) Front right middle effect unit 2600 having possible front right movable ornament 2610, and outer right effect having a predetermined decoration arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of front right movable ornament 2610 in front right middle effect unit 2600 And a unit 2700.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is capable of rolling in the left-right direction. The first stage 2511 can discharge the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. , Which is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511, is supplied with game balls from the first stage 2511 and can roll in the left-right direction, and can release the supplied game balls from a predetermined position into the front game area 1100. Two stage 2512, a chance entrance 2513 in which a game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 from a position below the second stage 2512 in a game area 1100 A chance exit 2514 that can be discharged into the interior.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is higher. It is formed in a wave shape. The first stage 2511 is formed at a heightened portion in the center in the left-right direction, and is lowered toward the front and widened in the left-right direction, and is lowest on both the left and right sides of the center discharge portion 2511a. And a side discharge portion 2511b which is formed in a part and becomes lower toward the front and whose width in the left-right direction is wider than that of the central discharge portion 2511a.

  In the first stage 2511, the front ends other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b protrude upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. . In addition, the first stage 2511 extends rightward so that the right end side in front view bites into the holding number display 2530 side.

  The second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side discharge portions 2511b in the first stage 2511 and to be lowered in the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is slightly higher in the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the center position in the left-right direction and is lowered toward the rear, and the width is increased in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the lowest portion on both the left and right sides of the center guide portion 2512a. And a side discharge portion 2512b having a width in the left-right direction wider than that of the center guide portion 2512a. In the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharge portion 2512b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the side discharge portion 2512b.

  A chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 opens forward in a wall-like portion extending between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 and extending in the vertical direction, and a central guide portion 2512a in the second stage 2512. It is arranged on the back side. Thereby, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided backward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

  The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed so as to open toward the front at a position below the center in the left-right direction of the second stage 2512 in the flange portion 2502a. The chance outlet 2514 includes a pair of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction and spaced apart in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. Thereby, the game ball released from the chance outlet 2514 is released into the game area 1100 in a state in which the swinging in the left-right direction is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. Yes.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is positioned immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 with the chance exit 2514 assembled, and a game ball is placed in the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514. Is released into the first start port 2101 with a high probability.

  Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely formed of a transparent member, and can be decorated with light emission by the center lower decorative substrate 2521. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515 and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

  Further, the number-of-holds display 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes a number-of-holds display board 2531 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and LEDs on the number-of-holds display board 2531 arranged on the front surface of the number-of-holds display board 2531. A grid-shaped light shielding member 2532 to be partitioned, a light guide member 2533 which is disposed in each lattice of the light shielding member 2532 and guides light from the LEDs of the reserved number display board 2531 forward, and each light guide member 2533 forward. A front cover 2534 having a plurality of facing openings and disposed on the front side of the light shielding member 2532; a front cover 2534, a light shielding member 2532;

  As shown in the figure, the upper surface cover 2535 of the reserved number indicator 2530 is formed in an arc shape that is inclined so that the left end side when viewed from the front is lowered and the center in the left-right direction is bulged upward. The top cover 2535 is disposed between the stage 2510 and the front right middle effect unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610), and the game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle effect unit 2600 side. Can be returned to the stage 2510 side. The top cover 2535 is formed integrally with the unit base 2502.

  The front effect unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is omitted in detail about the decoration, but the upper decorative member 2551 having a translucent logo formed in a shallow relief shape in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A plate-shaped diffusion light guide member 2552 disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2551 and capable of diffusing light, and a logo decoration substrate 2553 disposed on the upper side of the diffusion light guide member 2552 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower surface thereof. It is equipped with. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the upper decorative member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The front effect unit 2550 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting the LED of the logo decoration board 2553.

  The front right middle production unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 has a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an annular rotary decorative body 2630 that surrounds the outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 and is rotatable. The right middle movable decorative body 2610, the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the rear right middle decorative board 2640 are arranged. A rotary drive mechanism 2650 for rotating and driving the rotary decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and the rear drive unit 2650, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are supported. A base member 2660 supported rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and rotation for rotating the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range Is provided with a moving mechanism 2670, the. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by support pins 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is a transparent front decorative body 2621 whose outer periphery is circular and whose front surface bulges forward and whose front surface is indefinitely penetrated in the front-rear direction. And a disc-shaped post-decorative body 2622 having a translucency, which is disposed inside the front-decoration body 2621 and has a front surface that swells forward more loosely than the front surface of the front-decoration body 2621 and has predetermined characters embossed on the front surface. It is equipped with. The front right middle decorative board 2640 has a plurality of LEDs mounted at a position on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622 so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be decorated with light emission. Yes.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 having a plurality of partitioning pieces 2623a that are arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and project radially. In addition, the front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621a that project radially from the outer periphery and are respectively disposed between the partition pieces 2623a of the light shielding member 2623. The front end of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The partition piece 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are positioned inside the rotary decorative body 2630. The front right middle decorative board 2640 has an LED mounted on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, and the front end of the lens portion 2621a formed in a star shape can be decorated with light emission. .

  The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 via an annular spacer member 2624 in a state where the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are sandwiched. It has become.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is formed in an annular shape, and a predetermined decoration is three-dimensionally formed on the surface, and the decorations are penetrated in the front-rear direction. ing. The rotating decorative body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are opened, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the fixed decorative body 2620, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotating decorative body 2630 has a rear end that extends rearward from the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 and is attached to an annular operating gear 2654 of a rotation driving mechanism 2650 described later, so that the rotating decorative body 2630 can rotate with respect to the base member 2660. Has come to be supported.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED located on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 on the front right middle decorative board 2640.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2650 of the front right middle production unit 2600 includes a table first drive motor 2651 attached to the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotation decoration body 2630, and a table first drive motor 2651. A driving gear 2652 fixed to the rotation shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshing with the driving gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and meshing with the transmission gear 2653 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660 And an annular operating gear 2654 to which the rotating decorative body 2630 is attached.

  The front first drive motor 2651 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotation shaft extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. The drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are disposed between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

  The operation gear 2654 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The operation gear 2654 is disposed between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported by a guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. .

  The rotational drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotational position detection sensor 2655 that can detect the rotational position of the rotational decoration body 2630. The rotational drive mechanism 2650 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 2651 a that extends outwardly from the drive gear 2652, and the rotational position of the rotary decoration body 2630 is detected by detecting the detection piece 2652 a with the rotational position detection sensor 2655. Can be detected.

  The base member 2660 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and the rotation drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 includes an arm portion 2661 extending upward from a portion that supports the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right, and a bearing that is formed at the tip of the arm portion 2661 and is rotatably supported with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 that is formed on the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the portion that supports the bearing portion 2662 and the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and extends long along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And. The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached to the bearing portion 2662 so as to extend rearward on the rear side of the unit base 2502 is inserted, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It is like that.

  The motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 includes a guide piece 2664 extending in an arc shape around the bearing portion 2662 at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610. . The guide piece 2664 has a plate-like portion extending in the front-rear direction at the outer peripheral end centered on the bearing portion 2662, and is in an arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. To be inserted. As a result, the guide piece 2664 suppresses shaking in the front-rear direction when the base member 2660 is rotated.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is positioned on an extension line on the right side of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 on the right side when viewed from the front. Accordingly, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotated from the normal position to the appearance position in the leftward direction when viewed from the front by the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper right end of the first stage 2511. (See FIG. 157), even if the game ball bounces from the first stage 2511 in the right direction, the game ball can be prevented from coming into contact with the rotary decoration body 2630 of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being spoiled by the rotating rotating decorative body 2630, thereby preventing the original movement of the game ball from being impaired and causing the player to feel distrust. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined such that the left end side surface in front view is lowered at the left end. As a result, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520 are positioned below the rotary decorative body 2630. Since a space that can accommodate a game ball can be formed, even if the game ball deviates from the right end side of the first stage 2511 in the right direction, the game ball is accommodated and held in the space described above to move the game ball. Can be stopped, and the game ball can be prevented from moving differently from the original.

  Note that the game ball accommodated and held in the above-described space is moved (rotated) from the normal position to the left position in the front view by moving (rotating) the front / right middle movable decorative body 2610 obliquely at the left end of the guide piece 2664. Due to the side face, it rolls leftward (in the direction of the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Accordingly, depending on the speed at which the front right movable ornament 2610 is moved from the normal position to the appearance position, it is possible to fly the game ball accommodated and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 to the stage 2510 side (see FIG. 158). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center actor 2500, and the entertainment is lowered by making the player enjoy the movement of the game medium. Can be suppressed.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2670 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is attached to the rotation shaft of the table second drive motor 2671 and the table second drive motor 2671 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 so that the rotation shaft extends in the front-rear direction. A disk-shaped link wheel 2672 to be fixed, and a link pin 2673 supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660 are provided.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2670 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2673 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detects the rotation position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2684 is attached at a position where the right end in front view of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, when the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the table second drive motor 2671, the link pin 2673 revolves on the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pin 2673 revolves. At the same time that the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates around the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). Yes.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the link pin 2673 is disposed between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, so the front right middle movable decorative body is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. 2610 can be moved greatly. The front right middle production unit 2600 of this example has a normal position where the front right middle decorative body 2610 is positioned on the right side in front view of the window portion 2501 and the center side in front view of the window portion 2501 by the rotational movement mechanism 2670. It can be made to rotate between the appearance positions located in the.

  The link wheel 2672 of the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is positioned on the front side of the partition wall member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface faces the window 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). Thereby, an operator such as maintenance can rotate the link wheel 2672 by touching the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center accessory 2500 (game board 4). Even if a malfunction occurs in which the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than a predetermined position, the base member 2660 can be returned to the normal position by rotating the link wheel 2672 from the front side without disassembling the center accessory 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for maintenance, etc., and to reduce the time that the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a failure as much as possible, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game. It can be done.

  Further, although the detailed illustration of the front right middle production unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is omitted, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is at the rightmost position when viewed from the front, the support pin 2601 (bearing portion) 2662), a support pin 2601, a link wheel 2672, and the like are arranged so that a vertical line passing through the center of the link wheel 2672 passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. Thereby, the front right movable ornament 2610 can be rotated to the left in front view, and the appearance position of the front right movable ornament 2610 is moved closer to the center to make it easier to pay attention to the player. Be able to. Note that when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is returned from the appearance position to the normal position, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601, so the link pin 2673 During the revolution to the normal position after reaching the vertical line, the load from the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 or the like acts on the link pin 2673 to apply a load to the front second drive motor 2671, and the front right middle movable decorative element. Although the body 2610 may not be able to return to the normal position, as described above, the link pin 2673 is operated by rotating the link wheel 2672 partially exposed in the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to revolve and return the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 to the normal position.

  The front right outside direction production unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is a table having a predetermined character decoration on the front surface thereof disposed under the front right middle movable ornament 2610 with the front right middle movable ornament 2610 in the normal position. The right middle / lower decorative member 2710, the front right middle / lower decorative board 2711 disposed on the rear side of the front right middle / lower decorative member 2710 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the front right / lower middle decorative member 2710 on the front surface Front right middle upper decorative member 2720 having a decoration of different characters and arranged above the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and between the front right middle upper decorative body 2720 and front right middle lower decorative body 2710. An arc-shaped front right middle outer periphery decorative member 2730, which is arranged so as to surround the right outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610, and widens upward, the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 and the front right middle upper Of the decorative member 2720 A plurality of LED on the front is disposed on the side is implemented as a table right in the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, and a.

  The front right middle lower decorative member 2710 of the front right outside effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has translucency, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 so that a part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed. Forming. The front right / bottom decorative member 2710 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front-reserved number display unit 2530 so as to sandwich the front right / bottom decorative board 2711. The front right / bottom decorative member 2710 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front / right / bottom decorative board 2711.

  The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has translucency, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730. The front right middle / upper decorative member 2720 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the corresponding LED on the front right middle outer periphery decorative board 2733.

  The front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700 has a circular arc shape whose width increases as the outer shape goes upward, and has a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose circumferential length increases as it goes upward. A frame member 2731; and a lens member 2732 which is disposed on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and has a block portion which is inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731 and has translucency. The front right middle outer peripheral decorative body 2730 has a frame member 2731 attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the lens member 2732 and the front right middle outer peripheral decorative board 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It has come to be. The front right middle decorative board 2733 has LEDs arranged at positions corresponding to the openings of the frame member 2731, and can be decorated with light emission for each opening (block part of the lens member 2732). Yes.

  In the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the upper side and the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the state of being attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the clearance on the right outer periphery (so-called right hit), the game ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has a very high probability. A game ball can be passed through the portion 2105.

  Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 between the inner periphery of the game region 1100. . As a result, when the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the left side of the center bonus 2500, the game ball flows down in a complex motion within the area, and a game in which the game ball can be enjoyed can be performed. It has become. Further, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center object 2500, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the warp entrance 2504, so that the user can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. In addition, it is possible to raise the player's expectation by whether or not the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 is received in the first start port 2101 or the like, and entertains the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decorative body in front right middle production unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right middle effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle production unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body in FIG. 141 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and the effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a view of (a) from a slightly left position with respect to the front. (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left than (b). 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the structure of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is an explanatory view showing a state when the light is turned off, and (c) is a light emitting decoration mode when the light is blue. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of red lighting. In addition, about the member of the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed decorative body 2620A of this example can be replaced with the front decorative body 2621 and the rear decorative body 2622 in the fixed decorative body 2620 described above. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed in a front cover 2625, a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery and a front surface that bulges forward and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface. A thin plate-like effect sheet 2626, a thin plate-like diffusion lens sheet 2627 disposed on the rear side of the effect sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a rear cover disposed on the rear side of the diffusion lens sheet 2627. And a transparent disk-shaped holding member 2628 inserted into the inside 2626.

  In this fixed decorative body 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a light-transmitting smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film so that it looks black when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A is configured such that a relief-like decoration formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). As a result, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is viewed from the front without the light emitting decoration, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief reflected on the effect sheet 2626, and the distance from the front cover 2625 to the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 Due to this difference, the relief of the front cover 2625 looks more three-dimensional like a decoupage, and an unprecedented decoration can be presented to the player, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b) and (c). Furthermore, since the appearance changes depending on the position where the player sees, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144A, the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 includes a black portion 2626a that hardly transmits light, a blue portion 2626b that transmits light, and a transparent portion. It is composed of a red portion 2626c having light properties and an uncolored portion 2626d that is not colored. As a result, when the LED positioned on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A on the front right middle decorative board 2640 is not emitting light, the entire screen becomes blackish due to the smoke color of the base film as shown in FIG. In contrast, when the LED emits light in blue, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (c), and when it emits light in red, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (d). ing.

  More specifically, the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A has a black portion that is not included in any pattern when the pattern in FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern in FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped. 2626a and a portion included in any of the patterns is an uncolored portion 2626d. Moreover, when the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped, the part of only the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) is the blue portion 2626b, and only the pattern of FIG. The part is a red portion 2626c. Therefore, when the LED emits blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. The simulated pattern) emits blue light. In addition, when the LED emits red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. The simulated pattern) emits red light. When the LED emits white light, a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (a) emits light.

  In this way, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a three-dimensional effect when the relief formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the effect sheet 2626 when the LED of the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side is not emitting light. While a certain decoration can be presented, different patterns can be displayed in a light-emitting manner according to the light emission color of the LED, and various effects can be presented to the player so that it is difficult to get bored. Note that the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern that is displayed when the LED emits blue light, so that the pattern that emits blue light together with the relief of the front cover 2625 has a stereoscopic effect. Can be granted.

[2-5. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled from the back unit, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled from the back unit. is there.

  The back unit 3000 according to the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front side opened and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b that penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a rear view in the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. And a lock mechanism attaching portion 3010f to which the is attached. The back box 3010 is configured such that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d on the rear wall 3010a is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 comes into contact.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting each rendering unit 3100, 3300, 3500, a board, a cover, and the like.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010 and has a lower left decorative board 3020 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. A back lower right decorative board 3021 mounted at a position corresponding to the guide path member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front face, and attached to the front face of the rear wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. A back relay board 3022, a back right relay board 3023 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a rear wall 3010a on the left side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in front view. And a back left relay board 3024 attached to the front surface.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the rear face of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 at the lower left corner of the rear view below the opening 3010b and on the right side of the back face of the panel relay board 3025. A first drive board 3026 attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3010a in 3010, and a second drive board 3027 attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010 disposed on the right side of the rear face of the first drive board 3026. ing.

  The back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the rear side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. 3031 and a second drive board cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive board 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lock mechanism 3040 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3040 in this example is attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010f of the back box 3010 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. When the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion port that can be inserted from the side is opened and the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion port and the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion port is closed and the fixing piece 1902 cannot be removed. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a plate-like back left holder 3050 that is attached near the front end at the left end in the back box 3010 and extends in the vertical direction, and a second start port of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. 2102 and the back right guiding member 3060 which can be attached to a position corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 and can guide the game ball, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the front side unit 2200 in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. And a back left guiding member 3070 that is attached to a position corresponding to the two general winning holes 2201 and can guide the game ball.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a predetermined position of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guide member 3060 and can detect magnetism, and is attached to a predetermined position of the back left guide member 3070 and the first start port 2101. The first start port sensor 3081 capable of detecting the game ball received in the game, and the game balls received in the general winning ports 2104 and 2201 mounted at predetermined positions on the back right guide member 3060 and the back left guide member 3070, respectively. And a possible general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back side effect unit 3100 disposed over the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the left and right sides, and a back effect unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And a lower back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  The back left lower decorative board 3020 of the back unit 3000 is configured so that the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting LEDs mounted on the front surface. In addition, the back lower right decorative board 3021 can light-decorate the guide path member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front surface.

  The back relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the peripheral control board 4010. The back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100. The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100.

  The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 is connected to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, the main control board 4100 and the first start port sensor 3082, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general prize opening. This relay relays connections to the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the start port solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are based on the control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, provided in the door frame 5. 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and LED boards mounted on the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided in the game board 4 Based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159 provided in the game board 4 are controlled based on the control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010. This is for controlling the driving of 3302, 3506, and the like.

  The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp inlet 2504 in the center accessory 2500, and guides the game ball to the warp inlet 2504 using a magnet. It is possible to detect illegal acts.

  The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 is configured to support the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first start opening 2101 in the center accessory 2500. It is possible to detect fraudulent actions that are guided to 2101.

  The back right guiding member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 that can communicate with the general winning opening 2104 on the front surface of the upper end. A middle opening 3062 capable of communicating with the second start port 2102 is provided in the front surface of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guide member 3060 includes a right guide passage that extends from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end, allows game balls to flow therethrough, and has the lower end opened downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guide passage, and game balls that have entered the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guide passage.

  As a result, the back right guiding member 3060 is received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the gaming ball guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150 enters the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061. In addition, the game ball received in the second start port 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guide passage from the middle opening 3062. In the right back guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached at a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and a game ball from the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104. Only can be detected.

  The back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 is formed so as to straddle the part where the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is arranged and the part where the three general winning ports 2201 in the front side unit 2200 are arranged. It is arranged on the rear side. A middle guide passage 3071 that extends in the vertical direction at the right end portion when viewed from the front and allows a game ball to circulate, and has an upper end portion that can communicate with the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and a left side when viewed from the front of the middle guide passage 3071 Three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning ports 2201 of the front side unit 2200 are provided.

  The middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 has a lower end opened downward, and the opened front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. Thereby, the game ball received by the first start port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guide passage 3071 from the upper end portion and is guided downward by the middle guide passage 3071 from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. A first start port sensor 3081 is attached near the upper part and the lower part of the middle guide passage 3071 so as to detect one game ball twice. That is, although details are omitted, the reception (winning) of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first start port sensors 3081. If a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, for example, it is determined that an illegal act of inserting / removing an unauthorized tool to / from the first start port 2101 is performed, and A predetermined game process is performed.

  Although not shown, the back left guide member 3070 has a left guide passage having a discharge port through which the game ball can pass at the lower end in communication with the three left openings 3072 on the left side of the middle guide passage 3071 when viewed from the front. I have. A general winning port sensor 3082 is attached to the discharge port of the left guide passage, and any one of the three general winning ports 2201 receives a game ball, and is detected by one general winning port sensor 3082. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Next, the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main members, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main members. FIG. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back side effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotating decoration body unit in the back side effect unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back decorative unit of the back side effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit as seen from the back after disassembly. FIG.

  The back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on both the left and right sides, and is mounted on the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 is formed so that the back right effect unit 3100R and the back right effect unit 3100R arranged on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 are substantially symmetrical with respect to the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3100L, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the back right effect unit 3100R, which are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front, can be independently moved in the left-right direction. And a back side slide unit 3150 disposed on the back side.

  The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100 are supported by the back side slide unit 3150 so that the upper and lower ends are slidable in the left-right direction, and the front side and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 are in front. A vertically long box-like back side base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction is open, and a part of each of the open front side and the side facing the center of the back side base 3110 can be covered, and the front side of the back side base 3110 A back side decorative member 3111 attached to the back side, a vertical back side relay board 3112 attached to the outer side of the back side base 3111 opposite to the open center side, and a box-like back side base 3110 And three rotating decorative body units 3120 attached in a state of being arranged in the vertical direction.

  The back horizontal base 3110 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the height in the vertical direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Further, the back horizontal base 3110 protrudes upward from the front surface at the upper end and is connected to the lower end of the right connection member 3157 or the left connection member 3162 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150, and protrudes downward from the lower end and extends in the left-right direction. And a guided portion 3110b that is inserted and guided into the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back side slide unit 3150. The back side base 3110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The back side decorative member 3111 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is in a position corresponding to each of the rotary decorative bodies 3126 of the three rotary decorative units 3120 mounted in the back horizontal base 3110. A plurality of cutout portions 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of 3126 and the side facing the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. This back side decorative member 3111 is a portion between the cutout portions 3111a and can hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 positioned above and below the rotating decorative body 3126 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 from the player side. It can be done.

  Further, the back side decorative member 3111 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of back side decorative members 3111 penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to follow the decoration at positions corresponding to the back side decorative board 3130 in the rotating decorative body unit 3120. The opening 3111b is provided. Thereby, the light from the back side decoration board 3130 can be directly irradiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back side decoration member 3111.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L has a plate-like lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction, and the front of the lower base 3121 from the left-right center to the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a reverse lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation shaft extends to the lower base 3121 side. A drive gear 3124 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 3123 and the reverse lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121. The drive gear 3124 meshes with the drive gear 3124 and has the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. A spur gear-like driven gear 3125 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121; A rotating decorative body 3126 which is attached to the upper surface of the moving gear 3125 and has a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction and whose outer periphery is formed in a substantially square shape, and the rotational position of the rotating decorative body 3126 can be detected and attached to the upper base 3122. A rotational position detection sensor 3127.

  The rotary ornament body unit 3120 includes a semi-cylindrical lens member 3128 which is inserted into the rotary ornament body 3126 from above and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 3122 and extends in the vertical direction, and the string side of the lens member 3128. A vertical rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the lens member 3128, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the upper base 3122 at a substantially horizontal center. The back side decorative board 3130 is provided.

  The lower base 3121 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is formed so that the length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotating decorative body 3126, and on the opposite side of the drive gear 3124 with the driven gear 3125 at the left and right ends. The end is formed in a semicircular shape that is substantially concentric with the axis of the driven gear 3125. The lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. . The drive shaft portion 3121a is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed in the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. The driven shaft portion 3121b is inserted through a bush 3131 into a shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft core of the driven gear 3125.

  The upper base 3122 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is disposed on the side supporting the drive gear 3124 from the center in the left-right direction of the lower base 3121, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (side facing the center in the left-right direction in the opening 3010b) are opened. A box-shaped main body portion 3122a, a standing wall portion 3122b extending upward from the opened driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body portion 3122a, and a lower base 3121 from the upper end of the standing wall portion 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side. A top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotating decorative body unit 3120 of this example, a rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction is disposed between the lower base 3121 and the top plate portion 3122 c of the upper base 3122.

  The upper base 3122 is configured such that the lower end of the main body 3122 a is attached to the lower base 3121. Further, the upper base 3122 is configured such that a back lateral rotation driving motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The standing wall portion 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends upward higher than the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body portion 3122a. The top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular tip on the opposite side to the standing wall portion 3122b, and a lens member 3128 is attached to the lower surface.

  Note that an annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide tube (not shown) inserted into the interior of the rotating decoration body 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. The upper guide 3132 has an outer diameter of a guide tube inserted into the interior of the rotating ornament 3126 that is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotating ornament 3126. Can be rotatably supported.

  The driving gear 3124 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotating shaft of the reverse lateral rotation driving motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear which is formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshes with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c extending in a fan shape from the substantially vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a in a direction perpendicular to the shaft, and a shaft hole recessed upward from the lower surface side at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown) ) And. The drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121 so that the rotation shaft core of the gear portion 3124b arranged far from the back side rotation drive motor 3123 does not easily swing. It has become. The detection piece 3124c is detected by a rotational position detection sensor 3127 attached in the main body 3122a of the upper base 3122. The rotation decoration body 3126 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124. The rotation position of can be detected.

  As shown in the figure, the rotating decorative body 3126 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer periphery extends in the vertical direction of a substantially square shape. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction with the center as a substantially axial center. The rotating decorative body 3126 has translucency and has different decorations on the four outer surfaces.

  The lens member 3128 and the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the assembled state. The entire vertical direction of 3126 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly. Note that the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross section has a left and right side of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010 with respect to a surface (surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150) whose chord direction extends in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state of being inclined so that the central side in the direction is retracted (for example, in a state of being inclined about 30 degrees in plan view). As a result, the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 attached to the string side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side so that the player can feel brighter when the rotating decorative body 3126 is decorated with light emission. It has become.

  The back side decorative board 3130 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is attached on the front surface side of the main body 3122a in the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the standing wall 3122b. The back side decorative board 3130 is configured to allow the back side decorative member 3111 to emit light from the rear side by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  As shown in the drawing, the rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the present embodiment, when assembled, faces out of the four faces of the outer periphery of the rotating decorative body 3126 on the side opposite to the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Except for, three sides can be exposed. In addition, the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is configured such that the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are mounted in the back lateral base 3110, respectively.

  The rotating decoration body unit 3120 is formed symmetrically with respect to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L.

  The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side production unit 3100 is attached to a position above the opening 3010b near the front end in the back box 3010, and extends in the left-right direction so as to extend over substantially the entire width. The unit base 3151 The rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 that is attached to the upper rear portion near the right end of the front view of the front and extends through the unit base 3151 to the front and the flat fixed to the rotary shaft of the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152. A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 when viewed from the front, and a first transmission gear 3154. A first transmission gear 3154 supported rotatably by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side when viewed from the front. It has a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155 meshing with it and a rack gear 3156a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the second transmission gear 3155. A plate-like right slider 3156 supported so as to be slidable in the direction, and a right connecting member having an upper end attached to the lower end of the right slider 3156 and a lower end attached to the slider attaching portion 3110a of the back side base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R 3157.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a right slide position detection sensor 3158 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left and right direction slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects a slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the right slider 3156. Can be done.

  The back side slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and passes through the unit base 3151 and has a back side left slide drive motor 3159 extending forward. , A spur gear-like drive gear 3160 fixed to the rotating shaft of the back side left slide drive motor 3159, and a rack gear 3161 a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the drive gear 3160, and below the drive gear 3160 in the unit base 3151 A plate-like left slider 3161 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction at the position of the front side, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161 and a lower end is a slider attachment portion of the back side base 3110 in the back left effect unit 3100L And a left connecting member 3162 attached to 3110a.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a left slide position detection sensor 3163 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left and right slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects a slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the left slider 3161. Can be done.

  The back side slide unit 3150 includes a plate-like unit cover 3165 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151 and covers the front sides of the drive gears 3153 and 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161, and the like.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, the upper side is opened, and the right side of the back right effect unit 3100R is guided to be slidable in the left and right direction. The lower guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, opens on the upper side, and extends in the left-right direction to guide the lower end of the back left rendering unit 3100L to be slidable in the left-right direction. 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are slidably inserted into the guided portion 3110b of the back side base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L from above. The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L can be guided to be slidable in the left-right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are respectively provided from rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed to extend in the left and right directions at the upper ends, and from the left and right ends near the center in the left and right direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. A detection piece (not shown) that extends upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) that is formed with the rear side open and extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in parallel in the up-down direction. Yes.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into the guide grooves on the rear surface. Can be slid left and right. The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

  The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side extension unit 3100 rotates the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to move the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Can be independently slid in the left and right directions. Thus, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect are provided via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid in the left-right direction.

  The back side effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is rotatable about an axis extending in the up and down direction, respectively, to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L that are spaced apart in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The three rotating decoration bodies 3126 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the same axis, and the rotating decoration bodies 3126 arranged in the vertical direction are opposed to each other in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Is arranged. The back side effect unit 3100 of this example uses the back side slide unit 3150 to move the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L between the positions farthest apart (retreat position) and the positions closest to each other (appearance position). Each can be slid in the left-right direction independently. In the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are farthest apart, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located outside the front view of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500, respectively. The player is not visible from the player side (see FIG. 110, etc.). This state is a normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the back side effect unit 3100 is in a state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to positions closest to each other, the rotational decoration bodies 3126 supported so as to be rotatable are respectively centered. The three rotary decoration bodies 3126 that are located on the inner side of the window portion 2501 in the accessory 2500 and are arranged in the vertical direction from the player side are visible (see FIG. 159). Further, in the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are closest to each other, the width of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately larger than the normal state. It is designed to be half the size.

  The back side production unit 3100 is movable according to a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102.

[2-7. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  The back effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 3151 of the back side slide unit 3150 in the back side effect unit 3100. Yes. This rear effect unit 3300 is mounted in a back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction, and is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3301 in the vicinity of the left end of the front view. A back-side drive motor 3302 extending to the back, a spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft of the back-side drive motor 3302, and a rack gear meshing with the drive gear and extending in an arc shape And an arcuate plate-like slider (not shown) supported by the unit base so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the back rendering unit 3300 includes a back decorative body base 3305 attached to the front surface of a slider (not shown), a back decorative body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back decorative body base 3305 and provided with a predetermined decoration, A back decoration board (not shown) which is disposed between the back decoration body 3306 and the back decoration base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the back rendering unit 3300 is disposed on the rear side of the back decorative body base 3305 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301, and covers the front surface of the drive gear and the slider, and the unit base cover. 3308 and the unit base 3301 are supported in a predetermined position at the front end and the rear end, and are supported by three cylindrical shaft members extending in the front-rear direction (not shown) and rotatably inserted into the respective shaft members. And a plurality of bushes (not shown) that can come into contact with the slider. In this back rendering unit 3300, a slider is supported so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

  The back effect unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and a slide position detection sensor (not shown) that can detect the slide position of the slider. A backside relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026 is provided.

  The back rendering unit 3300 is provided with magnets at the right side end in front view of the back top decorative body base 3305 and the right end portion in front view of the unit base 3301, although not shown, and attracts each other. Installed in the direction.

  Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the rear effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Although not shown, the unit base 3301 includes three shaft holes that penetrate the predetermined position in the front-rear direction and into which a rear end of a shaft member (not shown) is inserted.

  Although not shown, the drive gear of the back rendering unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about 2/3 of the height of the unit base 3301, and is a large spur gear. It is considered as a gear.

  Although not shown, the slider of the back rendering unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width. A rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is arranged. In addition, the slider is formed at both ends in the circumferential direction for attaching the backside decorative body base 3305, a slit that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially radial center, and extends in the circumferential direction, and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plate-like detection piece formed on the outer right end of the rack gear as viewed from the front.

  The slider of the rear effect unit 3300 is configured such that a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by the shaft hole of the unit base 3301 abuts on the radially inner circumferential surface and slit. The bush that is in contact with it can be smoothly slid in the circumferential direction by rotating. Further, the slider has both ends of the slit closed, and the bush is brought into contact with the circumferential end of the slit so that the sliding range of the slider in the circumferential direction is regulated. Further, the slider of the back effect unit 3300 can detect the detection piece by the slide position detection sensor, and the slider, that is, the slide position of the back decorative body can be detected by detecting the detection piece. It can be done.

  Although not shown in detail, the back decorative body base 3305 of the back top effect unit 3300 is formed to extend along the slider in front view, the left end side in front view is attached to the left end of the slider, and the right end side is the unit. The base cover 3308 is attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown). The back decorative body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the substantially center in the left-right direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and has an outer shape that conforms to the outer shape of the back decorative body 3306.

  The back decoration unit 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape that imitates a clenched fist, and includes a decorative part 3306a having translucency made of predetermined characters at a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See FIG. 160). The backside decorative body 3306 is formed in a state close to opaqueness except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Although illustration is omitted, the color as the decoration applied to the front surface of the back decorative body 3306 is a color that becomes lighter (darker) as the distance from the outer periphery increases.

  The back decorative board of the back effect unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a on the front surface. As a result, the outer periphery of the back decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be decorated with light emission by the back decorative substrate.

  The rear effect unit 3300 of this example is supported by a unit base 3301 and a unit base cover 3308 so that the slider can slide in the circumferential direction at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In this slider, the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the slider arc in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (from the retracted position) where the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered with respect to the horizontal. Up to (appearance position state), it is possible to slide in the circumferential direction.

  In the normal state, the back effect unit 3300 is in a state where the left side of the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered with respect to the horizontal. In this state, the back decorative body 3306 attached to the front side of the slider. However, it is in the state located in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in the normal state, the back decorative body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 is positioned above the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is in a state invisible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in a state (see FIG. 110).

  On the other hand, when the back drive unit 3300 is driven by the back drive motor 3302 to slide the slider in the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the slider. The attached back upper decorative body 3306 is positioned below the front side of the unit base 3301 and the fist faces downward. In this state, the back decorative body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned at the approximate center of the window 2501. The state is visible from the side, that is, the appearance position (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The back lower effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is disposed on the rear side of the back left guiding member 3070.

  The back lower direction production unit 3500 of this example is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric predetermined shape and is partially translucent, and is arranged on the rear side of the back lower decorative body 3501 and on the front side. A backside decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) disposed on the backside of the backside decorative board and attached to the backside decorative body 3501, and the back side of the slider A shallow box-shaped unit cover 3504 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is slidable in the vertical direction and is open on the rear side. A shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 whose front side is opened, and a lower back drive motor 3 which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 and slides the slider up and down. It is provided with a 06, a.

  The lower back decorative body 3501 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape simulating a flame. Although not shown in the figure, the slider of the lower back direction production unit 3500 has a cylindrical support boss that is spaced apart in the vertical direction at both left and right positions and protrudes rearward, and a center in the left and right direction between the support bosses. And a pair of slits extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the back lower direction production unit 3500 has a pair of elevating guide grooves that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, penetrated in the front-rear direction, and extended in the up-down direction and into which the support boss of the slider is slidably inserted. And a through-hole portion that is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction between the pair of lift guide grooves and extends in an arc shape so as to bulge out the center in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 can support the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of elevating guide grooves.

  The unit base 3505 of the bottom effect unit 3500 has the same outer shape as that of the unit cover 3504, and a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction can be formed with the unit cover 3504. . The under back drive motor 3506 of the back under direction production unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and rotates while attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft extends through the unit base 3505 to the front side.

  Further, although not shown, the back lower direction production unit 3500 meshes with a drive gear and a spur gear-like drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lower drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear that is disposed on the right side of the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and meshes with the first transmission gear and is disposed on the right side of the first transmission gear. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and meshed with the second transmission gear and disposed at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the second transmission gear when viewed from the front. A spur gear-shaped third transmission gear rotatably supported by a base 3505, and a unit that meshes with the drive gear and that is on the left side of the drive gear in front view. A fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the sleeve 3505, an extending piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and protruding forward from the tip of the extending piece on the left side of the unit cover 3504 when viewed from the front. A left link member having a transmission pin that is slidably inserted into the slit on the left side of the slider through the through-hole portion, and meshes with the third transmission gear, and is located on the right side of the third transmission gear when viewed from the front The fan-shaped gear portion that is rotatably supported by the unit base, the extended piece that extends radially outward from the gear portion, and the front of the unit cover 3504 that protrudes forward from the tip of the extended piece on the right side of the unit cover 3504 And a right link member having a transmission pin that is slidably inserted into the slit on the right side of the slider through the through-hole portion.

  Although not shown, the back bottom rendering unit 3500 has the left link member and the right link member arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and the drive gear is driven to rotate by the back left drive motor 3506. The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears cause the left link member and the right link member to rotate in directions opposite to each other with the respective transmission pins at the same height. That is, when the left link member and the right link member are rotated, the height position of each transmission pin is changed, and the slider, that is, the lower back decorative body 3501 is slid up and down by the transmission pin. It can be moved up and down.

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, the lower back effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider inserted into the elevation guide groove in the unit cover 3504, and is arranged between the support boss and the elevation guide groove. A lifting bush, a transmission link inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pins of the left link member and the right link member inserted into the slit of the slider and disposed between the transmission pin and the slit, and an extension piece in the left link member An arcuate gear press disposed between the drive gear and attached to the unit base 3505, and an elevation position detection capable of detecting the slide position (elevation position) of the back decorative body 3501 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3505. Backside relay that relays the connection between the sensor and the backside decorative board and the second drive board 3027 attached to the front surface of the unit cover And it includes a plate, a.

  Although the illustration of the left link member of the lower back effect unit 3500 is omitted, the left link member includes a detection piece extending outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis. By detecting by the lift position detection sensor, the rotation position of the left link member can be detected, and thus the lift position of the back lower decorative body 3501 can be detected.

  In the back lower effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back lower decorative body 3501 is located below the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 in a state where the lower back decorative body 3501 is positioned at the lower end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction. It is located, and it is in the state (state of a retracted position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player side (refer FIG. 110). On the other hand, in a state where the back lower decorative body 3501 is positioned at the upper end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction, the back lower decorative body 3501 is positioned in the upper window portion 2501 from the lower side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. Thus, it is in a state visible from the player side (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 160). As shown in FIG. 160, when the back upper decorative body 3306 of the back upper rendering unit 3300 and the back lower decorative body 3501 of the back lower rendering unit 3500 are in the state of appearance, the lower end and the upper end of each of them. It approaches so as not to touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 115, and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. It is like that.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and is projected from the left side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the right side of the back side of the back box 3010, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3040. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward and closing the insertion slot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161), and the like, and a peripheral control board box 1910 on the rear side. , And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 that houses an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight, on the left side of the peripheral control board box 1910 when viewed from the back.

[2-10. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle production unit of the center actor in the front unit, and FIG. 158 (a) is a state where the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle production unit is in the normal position. And (b) is a perspective view seen from the front and slightly above in the state where the front right middle movable decorative body is in the appearance position. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back upper production unit and the back lower production unit in the back unit. . In the game board 4 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side through the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It is like that.

  In the normal state, the game board 4 has a front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle production unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 as shown in FIG. The outer periphery of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is located at the right end of 2501 and is surrounded by the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be visually recognized from the player side, whereas the rotating decorative body 2630 is viewed from the player side except for a part on the left side when viewed from the front. It is not visible.

  Further, in a normal state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upper decoration body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300, and the back lower decoration of the back effect unit 3500. Each of the bodies 3501 is located outside the window 2501 in the front view center accessory 2500 so that it cannot be seen from the player side.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front right middle production unit 2600 according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls from the normal state to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The back side effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3300, and the back bottom effect unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front right middle production unit 2600, by rotating the front first drive motor 2651, the annular rotating decorative body 2630 in the front right middle decorative body 2610 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, the rotating decoration body 2630 is in a state where only a part of the left side of the front view is visible from the player side. It is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward depending on the direction of rotation.

  In the front right middle production unit 2600, the base second member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotated around the front second middle drive motor 2671, with a bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof as the center. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be rotated and moved from the normal position located at the rightmost position in the front view in the normal state to the appearance position located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In this appearance position state, as shown in FIG. 157, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the front right outer effect unit 2700 to the left in the front view, and only a part of the left side in the front view is from the player side. The rotation decoration body 2630 of the front right middle decorative element 2610 that could not be visually recognized is detached from the rear side of the front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 and almost all of the rotation decoration body 2630 is visible from the player side.

  By rotating the front right middle production unit 2600 to the appearance position, the front right middle decorative body 2610 moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the front middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the player side. Can stand out. With the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 moved to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be made more conspicuous by rotating the rotary decorative body 2630 by driving the front first drive motor 2651. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right.

  In the front right middle production unit 2600, in the state of the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front of the stage 2510, and the front right middle movable decorative body is shown from the stage 2510 side. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

  Note that the guide piece 2664 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 is positioned on an extension line on the right side of the first stage 2511 of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. Since it is guided by an arc-shaped groove (space), a game ball that deviates from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) to the right is inside the groove (space) that guides the guide piece 2664. Even if it is stored and held (see FIG. 158 (a)), the front right middle effect unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610) moves from the normal position to the appearance position, thereby guiding the stored and held game balls. The piece 2664 can be pushed leftward and returned to the stage 2510 side.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle production unit 2600 can fly the game ball accommodated and held on the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position. (See FIG. 158 (b)), so that the player can be shown a movement different from the movement of the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the player can see the movement of the game medium. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  In the back side effect unit 3100 of the game board 4, the back side right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit are driven by driving the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back side slide unit 3150. 3100L can be moved from a position (retracted position) invisible from the player side to a position (appearance position) where it can be viewed from the player side by moving to the center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( (See FIG. 159). In the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is moved in the horizontal direction by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. In addition to the state in which the width is narrowed vertically, the rotating decoration bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the vertical direction are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen visible from the player side. Can be strongly attracted to the back right effect unit 3100R, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this back side production unit 3100, three rotating decorative bodies 3126 respectively supported by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are separately extended in the vertical direction by driving the back side rotation drive motor 3123. It can be rotated around the core, and when the rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are visible from the player side, by rotating them, A movable effect by the rotation of the rotating decorative body 3126 can be enjoyed.

  Specifically, for example, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 is moved to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body is driven by the back side rotation drive motor 3123 in the retracted position. 3126 is rotated so that the surface on which the predetermined decoration is applied is stopped so as to face the player side, and then it is moved to the appearance position, and the rotation decoration body 3126 is rotated every time it is moved to the appearance position. The stop position can be made different. As a result, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 changes every time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearance of the decoration.

  Alternatively, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated to the appearance position by each of the back lateral rotation drive motors 3123. You can also. As a result, a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3126 that roll like a roller appear on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player's interest is strongly expressed to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

  Furthermore, after the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 may be rotated by the respective back lateral rotation drive motors 3123, thereby enabling the back right effect. After the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered by the unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, the rotating decoration body 3126 supported by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is further rotated, thereby playing the game. The player can be surprised, and the player can be focused on the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like, and the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the back effect unit 3300 of the game board 4, by driving the back drive motor 3302, the back decorative body 3306 is slid downward in an arc from a retreat position that cannot be seen from the player side. It can move to the appearance position which becomes visible from a person side. In the state where the back decoration 3306 appears, as shown in FIG. 160, the approximate center of the fist in the back decoration 3306 simulating a fist is emergency from the player side located at the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in a conspicuous state and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, in the back lower direction effect unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the back lower drive motor 3506, the back lower decorative body 3501 can be seen from the retreat position where it cannot be seen from the player side, and the upper side visible from the player side It can be moved to the appearance position. In the state in which the back lower decorative body 3501 appears, as shown in FIG. 160, the liquid crystal display device 1900 extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 at substantially the center in the left-right direction. .

  When the game board 4 of this example is in a state where both the back effect unit 3300 and the back effect unit 3500 are moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the back ornament 3306 and the back decoration The upper end of the body 3501 is in a state of being close to each other, and the back upper decoration body 3306 imitating a fist performs a movable effect as if hitting the back lower decoration body 3501 imitating a flame. Can be done.

  Although not shown, the game board 4 includes a movable effect by the front right middle effect unit 2600, a movable effect by the back side effect unit 3100, or a movable effect by the back upper effect unit 3300 and the lower back effect unit 3500. It is possible to perform a movable effect combining the above, and present the player with more various movable effects, so that the player is less likely to get bored.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3081 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2125 and a general winning opening sensor 3082 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 2126, and a general winning opening, respectively. Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It has come to be.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2124 and the attacker via the panel relay board 3025 are output. A first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, and a first special signal are output to the solenoid 2113 via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3025, and the function display substrate 1191. A drive signal is output to the symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3082 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate 2105, so the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2114 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2114. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently are not frequently detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as the payout control input circuit 4111e. To the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the gaming board Motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 4 To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 A screen for transmitting light emission data from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or to display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is sent to the sound source IC 4140c. Or output.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various performances flow from the speaker 821, and provided to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command. Based on the game board side lighting / flashing command that is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in the door frame 5, A blinking signal is output to each of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided in the game board 4.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. To the dial drive motor 414 provided in the game board 4, the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, etc. provided in the game board 4.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a first drive board 3026 or a second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the first drive board 3026, the second drive board 3027, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay. The body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the terminal plate 882 or through the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various performances flow from the speaker 821. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a.

  When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2126 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the above conditions, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern 4206 and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the random number (ordinary lottery result) is “normal hit”, the start opening solenoid 2124 is driven and the movable piece 2106 is moved backward (immersed), and the start opening / closing control means 4208 and the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 are stored. And a normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers on the normal symbol memory display 1188 as a memory number.

  The normal symbol hold storage unit 4202 described above generates a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2126 while the normal symbol display control unit 4206 displays the variation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until normal symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3081 by the start winning to the first start port 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number; a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol storage unit 4214 is stored in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in advance. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table, and first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 Based on the pattern, the first special symbol display control means 4218 for variably displaying the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185, and the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 are stored. First special symbol memory number display control means 4220 for displaying on the first special symbol memory display 1184 as the memory number is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2125 by the start winning to the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number executed after being stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is stored in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol indicator 1186 based on the number of symbols, and the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol storage means 4224 The second special symbol memory number display control means 4230 is displayed on the second special symbol memory display 1187 as the memory number.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first special random number and the second special random number are triggered by the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125, respectively. ) And the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the special symbol can be changed.

  The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 for the start winnings 2101 and 2102. Priority reserved digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number in preference to the timing is provided, and the priority reserved digesting means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second start port 2102. The lottery result hold is prioritized (digested).

  The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. An advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2107 for closing the prize winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 A special prize opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the operation of the attacker solenoid 2113 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a first special random number or a second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol variation pattern) in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232, A fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table is further provided. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes, for example, to a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) in which a variation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal variation pattern table ( So-called probability variation), changing to a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol than the normal variation pattern table (for example, a time shortening variation pattern table) (so-called time reduction), The probability is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) having a high probability of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and a special symbol having a shorter variation time (so-called probability variation / short variation pattern table).

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol memory according to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Based on the second special symbol memory or the like, a command generation unit 4238 that generates a command for predetermined control such as an effect command, and a command transmission unit 4240 that transmits the command generated by the command generation unit 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140. And.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the center ball is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall portion 2503. It is guided to the left area of the accessory 2500. In addition, when a game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the game area 1100 The air enters the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 in the attacker unit 2100 through a narrow gap with the inner periphery, and is discharged into the game area 1100 immediately above the gate portion 2105 from the left end opening in front view of the guide passage 2142a.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 is guided to the guide path 2142a and released into the game area 1100, the gate sensor 2126 passes through the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability. Will be detected. When the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200 based on the detection signal.

  Based on this normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (for example, the normal symbol display 1189 composed of two red and green LEDs alternately emits light) for a predetermined time ( For example, a normal symbol based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of 0.1 second to 1 second) is stopped and displayed (one of the two LEDs of the normal symbol display 1189 emits light). The In this example, the same variable display is also performed on the normal symbol display board 1191a provided in the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100. The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the movable piece 2106 that closes the second start port 2102 moves backward for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the second start port A game ball can be awarded to 2102.

  In this example, since the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that has passed the gate portion 2105 and selected the “normal hit” lottery is The movable piece 2106 is retracted by the start port solenoid 2124 and can be received by the second start port 2102 at the timing of whether or not the movable piece 2106 closing the 2102 is reached. "" Is lottery, it is accepted to the second start port 2102 with a very high probability.

  Then, when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 through lottery of the “normal hit” after passing through the gate portion 2104, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125, and based on the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2125. The main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, so that one game ball is obtained. The payout is made to the upper plate 301. That is, in this example, when the game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed) that passes the right side of the center accessory 2500, the gate ball 2104 passes through the gate portion 2104 with a very high probability. If a game ball that has passed through the “normal hit” lottery is drawn into the second start opening 2102 with a very high probability, even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily win the second start opening 2102 It is possible to entertain the player.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the player can easily win a game ball to the second starting port 2102 by making a right strike. When the amount of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a risk of hesitation in installing the pachinko machine 1. However, in this pachinko machine 1, since the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game balls to the second starting port 2102 is one, the lottery of the special lottery result by winning to the second starting port 2102 It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem.

  Further, in this example, when the normal symbol display 1189 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the gate sensor 2126 detects the passing of the game ball, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first is stopped. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit is suggested by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are memorized and displayed. ing. Note that, when the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2104 and a “normal lose” is drawn, the movable piece 2106 disposed immediately below the gate portion 2105 and closing the second start port 2102 opens the second start port 2102. Since it remains closed, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 comes into contact with the upper surface of the movable piece 2106 and rolls leftward on the left shelf portion 2122g from the left discharge port 2122f. From the left end of the portion 2122g, the game is released into the game area 1100 below the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 and above the large winning opening 2103.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and have flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 are moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200. It has become. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center bonus 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls The tray 301 is paid out.

  If a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, It is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the region 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, or the big winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the lowest part after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. From the lowered portion, the gas is discharged back into the game area 1100 above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 in front.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2513 that is opened to the rear side in the center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction, it enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 that opens just above the first start port 2101. The first start port 2101 is received with high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3081, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a game ball is to be awarded to the first start port 2101, a driving operation (so-called left-handed) is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center object 2500. If the player wants to win a game ball at the second starting port 2102, the player may simply perform a driving operation (so-called right-handed) so that the game ball flows down the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to select a game ball driving operation according to interests, moods, etc., and to entertain and reflect the player's feelings.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows into the lower right side of the first start port 2101 without being received by the first start port 2101. , There is a possibility of being accepted into the big prize opening 2103. On the other hand, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows into the lower left side of the first start port 2101 without being received by the first start port 2101, the general winning port of the front side unit 2200 2201 may be accepted.

  In the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125. At the first start port 2101, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2102, the second special random number generator 4222 generates a predetermined second special random number.・ Each extraction is performed. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105. When the special symbol is variably displayed in the device 1186 or the special symbol such as during the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is won at the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor When it is detected by 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125 until the special symbol variation display is possible. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 so that the display is held. And Tsu, which is the number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold digesting unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Are executed (digested). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, the main control board 4100 selects the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3081 and the second start port sensor 2125 and the special random number of the second special random number as the first special symbol variation pattern selection. By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226, the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”. It is also determined whether it is any of the “big hit”, “4R big hit”, “8R big hit”, or “16R big hit”. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 sets the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 to the predetermined state after the advantageous game state generating means 4232 opens. When the time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions for winning the prize winning opening 2103, the opening / closing pattern (one) The opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round), and is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For “4R big hit”, four rounds, for “8R big hit”, for eight rounds, “16R big hit” If so, it is repeated 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, the random number determination table is replaced with a high-probability time / shortness table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means 4236 according to the extracted special random number.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (special lottery result) In addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 also corresponds to a special random number (special lottery result). An effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially. When the display is stopped and all the symbol sequences are finally stopped, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. That is, the reach effect image and the reach development effect image are images used for performing a reach effect (winning effect) for implying that a big hit may be won, and as a result of these reach effects, a plurality of According to the stop mode displayed when the symbol sequence of fluctuating is stopped, it is shown that the player can recognize whether it is a big hit or lost. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 162). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player particularly pays attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Also, the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 controls each of the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506 and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result in addition to the control of the effect image. The LED is mounted on the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided on the game board 4 as appropriate. In addition, the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the image effect by the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) in the table unit 2000, Combined effects (collaborative effects) using LCD, image effects by the liquid crystal display device 1900, and combined effects using effect units 2550, 2600, 2700, 3100, 3300, 3500 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 The pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get tired of can be made.

[4-1. Example of production]
Subsequently, an effect example (example of collaboration effect) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. 163 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the normal state facing the window of the center accessory in a simplified manner, and FIG. 163 (b) shows the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit appearing while rotating the rotating decorative body. And it is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which divides the display screen of a liquid crystal display means into three, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotation decoration body following (b). FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six regarding the appearance of the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit unlike FIG. Further, FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect that appears by changing the rotational position of the rotating decorative body before the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit appear.

  First, in the normal state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 are located at the retracted positions away from each other. In this state, The right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located on the left and right outer sides of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500, respectively. Therefore, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 are invisible from the player side by the center role 2500 and the game panel 1150, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed through the window portion 2501. Only the display screen is visible from the player side (see FIG. 163 (a)).

  In this state, a game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is received into the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, and when a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left The back side rotation drive motor 3123 of each of the three rotary decoration body units 3120 provided in the effect unit 3100L is driven, and the three rotary decoration bodies 3126 arranged in the vertical direction are rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the rotation speed at this time is a speed at which the decoration applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary decoration 3126 is difficult to recognize.

  The back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 of the back side slide unit 3150 are rotated in a state where the three rotating decorative bodies 3126 respectively provided in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are rotated. Are driven, and the back right effect unit 3100R is slid in the left direction in the front view, and the back left effect unit 3100L is slid in the right direction in the front view.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display screen is divided into upper and lower parts so as to correspond to the rotating decoration bodies 3126 arranged in three rows vertically on the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, respectively. Display a different image.

  Then, when the back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L are slid in the direction approaching each other from the retracted position, from the left and right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which three different images are displayed, A rotating decorative body 3126 appears, and the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating decorative body 3126 and the effect images divided into three parts.

  The back-right effect unit 3100R and the back-left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions that are closest to each other with the rotating decorative bodies 3126 rotated (see FIG. 163 (a)). In the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L may be slid to the left and right until the appearance position is reached. A sense of urgency can be given to entertain the player.

  Then, when the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L reach the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotating is stopped. When stopping the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126, the decoration corresponding to the lottery special lottery result is applied to the decorations such as the four patterns and symbols applied to the outer periphery of the rotating decorative body 3126. It stops so that the surface to face the player side (see FIG. 163 (c)). Thereby, the combination of decorations displayed by a plurality (six in this case) of rotating ornaments 3126 suggests to the player the result of the lottery that has been drawn and enhances the player's expectation of the game. Can be done.

  In this effect, there are a pattern in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 that are rotating are stopped simultaneously and a pattern in which the rotation is sequentially stopped according to a special lottery result. In addition, during this effect, the LED of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 emits light as appropriate.

  In addition, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the above effect as shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is also possible to perform an effect of dividing into six parts so as to correspond to each separately. In this effect, while each rotating decoration body 3126 is rotated, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance position, and the display screen is divided into six parts corresponding to each rotating decoration body 3126. And display different images (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L arrived at the appearance position, the rotating decorative bodies 3126 that are rotating are sequentially stopped (see FIG. 164 (b)). ). The rotation decoration body 3126 that stops the rotation is such that when all the rotation decoration bodies 3126 are stopped from rotating, the combination of the decorations facing the player side becomes a combination corresponding to the lottery special lottery result. Then, the respective rotary decoration bodies 3126 are stopped sequentially.

  Thereafter, when the rotation of all the rotating decorations 3126 is stopped, the combination of the decorations that stop at the rotating decorations 3126 and face the player side suggests a special lottery result drawn for the player, and the player This makes it possible to increase the expectation of the game (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  In this effect, in a state where all the rotating decoration bodies 3126 are rotated with the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L as the appearance positions, each of the lights is circulated around the six effect images. There is a pattern in which the LEDs of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 provided in the rotating decorative body unit 3120 emit light sequentially. In addition, there is a pattern in which the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 for stopping the rotation is blinked, or the LED of the back side decorative board 3130 disposed beside the rotating decorative body 3126 is made to emit light. Furthermore, there is also a pattern in which the rotating decoration body 3126 is decorated with light emission with colors according to the colors of the images divided into six and displayed respectively.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, a normal state in which the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are positioned in the retracted position (see FIG. 165 (a)), That is, in a state where the rotating decoration body 3126 cannot be visually recognized from the player side, the rotation decoration body 3126 is rotated, and the surface on which the specific decoration according to the lottery special lottery result is given faces the player side. Rotate to stop. In this state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions, respectively, and the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appear and can be seen from the player side. The decoration of the rotating decoration body 3126 (see FIGS. 165 (b1) and (b2)) suggests the player the special lottery result, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game.

  Thus, every time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L (a plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3126) appear, the decoration of the rotation decoration body 3126 seen from the player side is different (FIG. 165 (b1)). , (See (b2)), the player can be excited by the decoration of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, which makes the player more enjoyable and less interesting. Can be suppressed.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 166 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such like, random numbers to be subjected (usually random) in accordance lottery processing operation triggered become per the Toraku of the movable piece 2105.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is won for starting, the second starting port 2102 is won for starting. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 166 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2126, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning port sensor 3082, and the like are received. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a winning as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2106 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a higher driving frequency of the movable piece 2106 during the period until the big hit again after the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit gaming state). In this way, the lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased until the big hit is again after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery is selected. When the result is successful, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2106.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning port sensor 3082, etc., as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3081. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2125 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is “4R latent probability variation big hit (specific 1)”, “4R probability variation big hit. (Specific 2) ”and“ 4R normal big hit (non-specific) ”are suggested. According to the 4R big hit gaming state, the winning prize opening 2103 is controlled to be opened, and“ 8R probability variable big win (specific 4) "is controlled in accordance with the 8R big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 2103 is controlled to be opened, and" 16R sudden probability change big hit (specific 3) "," 16R positive change big hit (specific 5) ) ”Is executed, a process of controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the 16R big hit gaming state of short-time opening or long-time opening.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3081 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S44. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2125 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 described above (see FIG. 166).

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 173 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, the six types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 2393 types of first special random numbers are determined to be out of place. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. Note that, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to, the two types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 2393 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the

  Moreover, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 60 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability coincide with the jackpot determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 2339 types of first special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process performed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. 60 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, like the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that it has been won and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 2339 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that they are out of place, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the probability change used when the gaming state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state)). Time reach determination table and a normal reach determination table used when the gaming state is normal (normal state). In the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach random numbers are not matched with the reach determination values indicating that all 239 types of reach random numbers are reached, and are not matched with the reach determination values indicating not reach. Each is associated. As described above, at the time of probability change (high probability state), since it is not determined that the reach is lost when it is determined that the reach is lost, the reach flag described later is not set and the reach effect is executed. There is no. For this reason, when a reach is formed at the time of probability change and a reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that it will be a big hit at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  Further, in the normal reach determination table, the reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the 7 types of reach random numbers are reached, and the reach determination value indicates that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Are associated with each other. As described above, the reach determination value indicating the reach is provided in the normal time (normal state), unlike the probability change time (high probability state). For this reason, even if the reach is formed at the normal time and the reach effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117) and determines that the reach is shifted (step S118), the change A reach flag indicating that becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 174, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 173 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 173 (C), the symbol determination table includes a determination result (specific 1 4R latent probability variation per unit, specific 2 4R probability variation per unit, specific 3 16R sudden probability variation per unit, specific 4 8R probability variation per unit, Symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers) are stored in association with specific 5 16R probability variation big hits and non-specific 4R normal big hits. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1.4R big hit gaming state (open / close pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated four times (four rounds)), and after the 4R big hit gaming state ends, the high probability non-short time In the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is controlled to a specific 1R 4R latent probability variation big hit 2.4R big hit game state for executing a game effect that is difficult to determine whether the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a high probability state or not. After the end of the big hit game state, the specific 2R probability variable big hit is controlled to the high probability short-time state again until the big hit is reached. ) Repeat) is controlled in such a way that the game ball is difficult to enter, and after the 16R big hit game state is finished, it becomes a big hit again. The specific 3R 16R sudden probability change big hit is controlled to the high probability short time state 4.8R big hit gaming state (opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated 8 times (8 rounds)) After the end of the big hit gaming state, the high probability short-time state is controlled until the big hit is reached again. 4. Specific 8R probability variable big hit 5.16R The big hit gaming state is controlled, and after the 16R big hit gaming state ends, the high 16R probability variable jackpot of 5 controlled to the probability short-time state 6.4R jackpot gaming state is controlled, and after the 4R jackpot gaming state is finished, the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled. Non-specific 4R normal jackpots that execute game effects that are difficult to determine whether or not the device 1900 is in a high probability state, and six types of jackpots Decide on one of the jackpots.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set so that the judgment value distribution is different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 4R latent probability variation hit, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 16R sudden probability variation big hit, In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the specific 1 4R latent probability variable big hit is specified in the symbol determination table corresponding to the special 4R probability big hit and non-specific 4R normal big hit. Determination value distribution is set for 5 16R probability variation big hit and non-specific 4R normal big hit.

  In this example, specific 1, 2, 4 to 6 and non-specific and specific 3 are the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state (the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is controlled to open). Different times). Specifically, in the case of specific 1, 2, 4 to 6 and non-specific, it is controlled to a long open state in which the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is 30 seconds, In the case of a specific 3R sudden probability change big hit, the open time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to a short open state that is 0.05 seconds that is extremely shorter than the long open state. In this way, when the specific 3 16R sudden probability change big hit is reached, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is too short, and the opening control of the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is recognized. Even so, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 2103. In other words, during the control of the short release state in the big hit game state, the game ball rarely wins the large winning opening 2103, and unlike in the control of the long open state, a large number of game balls are expected to be acquired. I can't.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 4R latent probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 4R latency probability variation jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 is determined, 4R of the first special symbol is determined. If it is determined to be a probable big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be a specific 3 16R sudden probability variable big hit, it will be decided to be a 16R sudden probability variable big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to be a specific 4 8R probability variable big hit, the first special symbol The 8R probability variable jackpot symbol is determined, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 4R normal jackpot, the 4R normal jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be the off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (indication of one of the types of jackpots, losing reach, or losing (the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol is The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the information may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the specified 2R probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the change of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. In this case, the 4R probability variation big hit symbol (the combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) is determined, and the specific 4R 8R probability variation big hit is identified among the big hits. In this case, the 8R probability variation big hit symbol ("1", "3", "5", a combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of "7", common with 4R probability variation big hit symbol) is determined, and a specific 5 16R probability variation big hit symbol is determined. Is specified, it is determined to be 16R probability variation jackpot symbol ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combination of same decorative symbols. Common to 4R probability variation jackpot symbol and 8R probability variation jackpot symbol) And variation pattern command The determined stop symbols at the time lapse of the variation time specified (when the game effects termination) controls display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. From 4 to 2R probability change big hit, 4 to 4R probability change big hit, and 5 to 16R probability change big hit can not be determined, but high after 4R big hit gaming state, 8R big hit gaming state or 16R big hit gaming state It can be determined that the control is in the probability state. Until the effect result in the 4R big hit gaming state is derived, it is not possible to determine whether or not the 8R big hit gaming state or the 16R big hit gaming state is continuously controlled after the 4R big hit gaming state ends.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies a specific 1R 4R latent probability variation big hit out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. Is determined to be a 4R latent probability variable big hit symbol (a combination of the same decorative symbols of even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”), and if a non-specific 4R normal big hit is specified among the big hits, 4R normal Big hit symbol (“2”, “4”, “6” combination of the same decorative symbols of the even number. Common with 4R latency probability variable big hit symbol) and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (game) At the end of the production), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, a specific one is determined from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols. It is difficult to determine whether the 4R latency probability big hit or the non-specific 4R normal big hit, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state even after the 4R big hit gaming state ends. Since the effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies the specific 3R 16R sudden probability change big hit from the big hits from the received determination result notification command as the stop mode of the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is determined to be a 16R sudden probability variation big hit symbol (predetermined combination of decorative symbols out of symbols (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of “357”), and is specified from the variation pattern command. The liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol when the variable time has elapsed (when the game effect ends). As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, it is determined whether the 16R sudden probability variation big hit is specified 3 from the decorative symbol stop symbol. It is possible to determine to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state (16R big hit game state in a mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter).

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as an aspect at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (stop symbol), if the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol with loss is included. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 175, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the jackpot flag. If so (Step S141), the type of jackpot determined in Step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (Step S142), and reach is performed. If the flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144). If neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal If it is out of place (out of reach with no reach effect), the fluctuation pattern during the outage Selecting a table (step S145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S149). As a result, the effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, a super reach effect (for example, equivalent to the SP1 type and SP2 type win effects in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later) is a normal reach effect (for example, a normal type of win effect in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later). When the super-reaching effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased. Detailed description regarding the reach effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described later.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, the variation time information of one kind of special symbol set to about 1 second in the variation pattern table at the time reduction is associated with all of the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In the form, a special pattern variation pattern is set. On the other hand, in the non-temporal variation pattern table, the variation of the special symbol in the form that the variation time information of multiple types of special symbols set in the range of 10 to 120 seconds is associated with each of the special symbol random numbers. A pattern is set. That is, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time reduction, the special symbol fluctuation time information is set so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is shortened to about 1 second as compared with the non-time reduction fluctuation pattern table. ing.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the processing, display control for causing the first special symbol display 1185 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the time-short flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When the process is updated so as to be transferred (step S190), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is a jackpot type (4R latent probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit, 16R sudden variation per unit, 8R probability variation per unit, 16R probability variation per unit, 4R normal variation per unit). It is prepared individually for each. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R latent probability variation big hit command, 4R latent probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit per 4R normal probability big hit) Big hit start command, 16R sudden probability change big hit start command, 8R probability change big hit start command, 16R probability change big hit start command, 4R normal big hit start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, the main signal is displayed as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1189. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the game (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per normal map”, the movable piece 2106 moves backward and accepts the game ball to the second start port 2102. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process to be controlled (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is counted up (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the current game state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S826). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a and is used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state). And a non-time-saving usual time per-judgment determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2105, the winning piece is always won by the normal time, and the movable piece 2106 is moved backward to accept the game ball to the second starting port 2102. It is possible to control.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, even when the game ball passes to the gate portion 2105 at the non-time saving time, the movable piece 2106 is retracted and moved to the second starting port 2102 because it is not won per hit. It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game balls.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 181, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes a command (for example, an effect command) received from the main control board 4100, and, according to the analysis result, a plurality of types of flags stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e. Among them, the flag corresponding to the command is set.

  In the effect control process of step S602, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. The command received from the main control board 4100 is, for example, a variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting). Fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the process)), start port passing process (steps S45 and S47 of the first start port passing process, steps S55 and S57 of the second start port passing process) This is a hold number designation command, a random number designation command, or the like transmitted by. In the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control ROM 4140b has an “effect pattern” as a display effect pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in association with each change pattern based on the change pattern command. Each is remembered. In the effect control process in step S602, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command, and causes the liquid crystal display MPU 4150a to execute a display effect based on the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900. . Detailed processing of the effect control processing will be described later.

  In the sound control process in step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  Below, the detailed process of an effect control process (step S602 of FIG. 182) is demonstrated. FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes one of steps S1210, S1220, and S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. The process selection flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variation pattern command and the big hit command, and the notice effect is set. Here, the jackpot command is one of the commands received from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control MPU 4140a in step S601 of FIG. 182, and is a command indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. The received jackpot command is analyzed for the jackpot information indicated by the command by the command analysis processing in step S601.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the processing selection flag is “1”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation stop command related to the special symbol variation stop from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal controller 4150 ( In particular, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) to perform control to stop the decorative symbol variation display.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the liquid crystal display via the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in accordance with the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to cause the device 1900 to display the start of the big hit gaming state and the display during the big hit gaming state (for example, round display).

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process. As shown in FIG. 184, first, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1211). The variation pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in the command analysis process (step S601) described above and indicates that a variation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. The variation pattern reception flag is held in, for example, the peripheral control RAM 4140e. If the variation pattern reception flag is not set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the variation pattern command has not been received and ends the processing.

  When the variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the variation pattern reception flag (step S1212), and the variation pattern based on the received variation pattern command generates a big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a hit pattern) (step S1213).

  If the variation pattern is a hit pattern in step S1213 (YES in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines a stop symbol of a decorative symbol that forms a jackpot symbol array that suggests a big hit based on the variation pattern ( Step S1214). If the variation pattern is not a winning pattern in step S1213 (NO in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that forms the loss symbol array that suggests the loss based on the variation pattern. (Step S1215).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is a symbol displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The decorative symbol varies with the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the stop mode. That is, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a win (big hit), the change pattern command indicating the change pattern of the win pattern is sent from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that forms a jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “out of” which is not a winning (big hit), a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of a missing pattern that is not a winning pattern is controlled from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control. It is transmitted to the board 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control MPU 4140a), and when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detachment manner, the decorative symbol is also stopped at a stop symbol that forms a symbol pattern. Is displayed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not to perform a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1216), and an effect pattern (details will be described later) based on the variation pattern. The effect time (variation time) determined based on the variation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and decided in steps S1214 and S1215 The display command corresponding to the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is set. Note that in the case of a pachinko machine that does not include a notice effect, the notice selection process in step S1216 is not necessary, and in the processes after step S1217, information processing related to the notice effect (for example, input / output to the notice type storage area) is performed. Processing) becomes unnecessary. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a updates the process selection flag to “1” (step S1218) and ends the process.

  Note that the display command set in step S1217 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S605 in FIG. 182). Based on the received display command, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the effect stop command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the effect stop command to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is based on the received effect stop command. The change display of is terminated.

  Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1217, after reading the notice pattern, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared to thereby change the next decoration pattern. At the time of display, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when starting the variable display of the previous decorative symbol from being erroneously executed.

[6-1. Determination of production pattern including winning production]
Next, the “effect pattern based on the variation pattern” described in step S1217 of FIG. 184 will be described in detail. The “effect pattern” is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 based on the change pattern (special pattern) determined by the main control board 4100. In other words, the “decoration pattern change pattern” It is. The effect pattern (decoration pattern variation pattern) is determined from a plurality of types of effect patterns stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like. Such an effect pattern includes a variation pattern that can execute a display effect including a winning effect (an effect pattern that includes a winning effect) and a variation pattern that can execute a display effect that does not include a winning effect (an effect pattern that does not include a winning effect). ) Strictly speaking, the winning effect includes an effect that forms a reach state and an effect that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit (post-reach effect). This is called (reach production).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a advances the effect according to the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a sound from the speakers 121 and 391 by outputting a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c, and outputs a drive command to the motor drive board 3013a. The liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image by operating and outputting a display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (liquid crystal control MPU 4150a). Below, the effect pattern containing a winning effect is demonstrated in detail among such an effect pattern.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the determination result in the special symbol variation pattern and the effect time. As described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, the main control board 4100 sets the determination result notification command (step S125) based on the result of the special lottery and the variation pattern command (step S147) corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol. . Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100. FIG. 185 summarizes a relationship example between the special lottery result (determination result) and the variation time (effect time) for the special symbol variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 in this way. In FIG. 185, as an example, the determination result of the special lottery (in this case, the first special lottery result in the normal state) and the effect time (for the part of the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see step S146 in FIG. 175)) (Variation time) is shown (special symbol variation pattern table). In the following description regarding the winning effect, the first special symbol will be described for the sake of brevity, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  The determination result column in FIG. 185 is divided into “out of”, “low hit”, and “high hit” based on the special lottery result notified by the determination result notification command. For example, in the “missing” column of FIG. 185, variation patterns transmitted in combination with a determination result notification command for notifying “missing” or “reaching” are collected. In FIG. 185, fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or more are collected, and the reach flag is set for all the fluctuation patterns of the shift pattern in such a relatively long fluctuation time (reach is formed). ). In other words, the fluctuation pattern of “out of” shown in FIG. 185 is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a special random number such that “with reach” is selected in the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173 (B). It is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach deviation” (in the following description in this section, for the sake of brevity, it is simply referred to as “displacement” or “displacement pattern”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a that has received the special symbol variation pattern of such an outlier pattern displays a variation pattern (an effect pattern including a winning effect) in which a display effect including a winning effect is executed as an effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern. The display command is set based on the selected variation pattern or the like (see step S1217 in FIG. 184).

  In addition, the “low hit” column in FIG. 185 summarizes the variation patterns transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to “low hit”, and the “high hit” column in FIG. 185. In the table, fluctuation patterns transmitted in combination with a determination result notification command for notifying a big hit corresponding to “high hit” are collected.

  Here, “high hit” and “low hit” used in the present embodiment are tentative names when a plurality of types of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 are classified based on a predetermined standard regarding the degree of advantage. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are prepared. Specifically, for example, rounds for big hits such as “4R big hit”, “8R big hit”, “16R big hit” There are jackpots with different numbers. In addition, for example, there is a big hit such as “probability change” or “short time”, in which the gaming state controlled after the big hit is different. In addition, it is possible to consider a big hit (a big hit with a relatively long opening time and a relatively short big hit, etc.) in which the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening 2103 is different in each round during the big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such multiple types of big hits are handled by classifying them into “high hits” having a relatively high degree of advantage and “low hits” having a lower degree of advantage than “high hit”. In addition, it has a feature that the distribution ratio of the winning effect described later can be varied depending on whether the big hit is “high hit” or “low hit”.

  In the following description of the embodiments, as an example, the probability variation big hit is “high hit”, and the other big hit (so-called normal big hit) is “low hit”. That is, in the specific type of jackpot exemplified in FIG. 173 (C), the specific 1 to the specific 5 correspond to “high hit” and the specific 6 corresponds to “low hit”. In addition, according to the illustration of FIG. 173 (C), in the special lottery (first special lottery) using the first special symbol, the case where the first symbol random number is “40-199 (160 pieces)” is “high hit”. Since the case where the first symbol random number is “0-39 (40)” is “low hit”, the ratio of “high hit” and “low hit” by the first special lottery is 160: 40 = 4: In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the ratio between “high hit” and “low hit” in the first special lottery is 1: 1. Further, other examples regarding the classification and setting of “high hit” and “low hit” will be described in detail in [6-5].

  FIG. 185 exemplifies at what rate the effect time (variation time) of the variation pattern will be for each category of the determination result of the special symbol. For example, in the case of “off”, 34% is a variation time of 20 seconds, 50% is a variation time of 30 seconds, 15% is a variation time of 60 seconds, and 1% is a variation time of 120 seconds. At this time, the average fluctuation time at the time of “out” is 32 seconds. Similarly, for “low hit” or “high hit”, 5% is a change time of 20 seconds, 50% is a change time of 30 seconds, 60% is a change time of 60 seconds, and 10% is a change time of 120 seconds. It will be time. The average fluctuation time at the time of “low hit” or “high hit” is 56.5 seconds. Therefore, in the case of a special symbol variation pattern as shown in FIG. 185, when the reach effect is revealed, the average is more likely to be a hit (low hit or high hit) than when the result is lost. The typical fluctuation time tends to be long.

  Also, with reference to FIG. 185, considering the breakdown of the determination result when the variation time is the same, all of “out of”, “low hit”, and “high hit” are listed with the denominator as 100. Therefore, the appearance ratio of each determination result when the variation time is used as a reference can be calculated from the distribution ratio of each determination result. For example, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the allocation number of each determination result is 50 for “out of”, 25 for “low hit”, and 25 for “high hit”. : “Low hit”: “High hit” = 50: 25: 25 = 2: 1: 1. In addition, since “big hit” is the sum of “low hit” and “high hit”, the appearance ratio of “out” and “big hit” when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is “out of”: “big hit” = 50: 50 = 1: 1. That is, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, “out of” and “big hit” appear one-on-one, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for winning the big hit is 50%.

  Further, when the low hit and the high hit are considered separately, from the above relationship of “out of”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 50: 25: 25 = 2: 1: 1, When the appearance ratio of 1 is 1, the appearance ratio of the deviation is 2. At this time, 1/4 (25%) is low hit or high hit, and 2/4 (50%) is lost, so in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the winning expectation for “low hit”, and The winning expectations for “high hits” are 25% each.

[6-1-1. Distribution of production pattern with variation time of 30 seconds (part 1)]
FIG. 186 is a diagram (distribution table 1A) for explaining distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The effect pattern (decorative pattern variation pattern) is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern. If the effect pattern thus determined is an effect pattern including a winning effect (reach effect), the winning effect is displayed. An effect pattern to be executed is selected from among the plurality of effect patterns that are present (substantially, there is no problem even if it is read as a winning effect to be executed). FIG. 186 exemplifies distribution of selection of an effect pattern including such a winning effect, and distribution of the effect pattern used when the variation time is “30 seconds” as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Table 186, the effect time (decoration time of decorative symbols) of each winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern is 30 seconds, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, half (50%) of the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the variation time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. Note that the allocation of the winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is an example for the sake of brevity, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them out as necessary.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores a game result in the peripheral control RAM 4140e or the like when an effect pattern including a specific winning effect is selected and executed, and the decorative symbol comes off and stops in the symbol array due to the winning effect. However, in the subsequent game, it is possible to change the distribution of the selection of the effect pattern including the winning effect among the plurality of effect patterns. Specific contents regarding the distribution variation will be described with reference to FIG. An effect pattern including a “specific winning effect” is an effect pattern in which a “specific winning effect” is executed, and selecting and determining such an effect pattern is substantially equivalent to a “specific winning effect”. Is equivalent to selecting and determining. Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of simplicity, “winning effect” may be described instead of “the effect pattern including the winning effect”.

  First, “type” in FIG. 186 is a type that roughly divides the winning effect, and “normal”, “SP1”, and “SP2” are provided as an example. The winning effects included in “SP1” and “SP2” generally correspond to the winning effects such as “super reach”, which is a big hit compared to the case where the “normal” type winning effects are presented. Expectation degree (reliability) is set relatively high. In FIG. 186, as an example, the types are roughly classified based on the contents of the effect of the winning effect. In the winning effect of the “SP1” type, the effect of the mode in which the story progresses proceeds, and the big hit ( And its type) are displayed in such a manner that they can be recognized. In addition, in the “SP2” type winning effect, as an example, the effect in the battle format progresses, and is displayed in a manner in which it is possible to recognize whether it is a big hit (and its type) or not depending on the progress result. In addition, the winning effect that is different from “SP1” and “SP2” is the “normal” type. Although details will be described later, the allocation of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the appearance status of the winning effect (which winning effect has been selected and executed, and further, the winning effect is connected to the big hit. The distribution contents are changed by accumulating “war history” according to whether or not, etc.), but “initial setting” (corresponding to war history P) before receiving the change due to war history accumulation , It is assumed that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot for each type is set higher in the order of “normal”, “SP1”, and then “SP2”. The contents of the winning effect described in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to specific examples in FIGS.

  “Production name” in FIG. 186 is a name example of each winning production. For example, “normal” and “long” are described in the production names included in the “normal” type, and “story A”, “story B”, and “story C” are included in the production names included in the “SP1” type. And “Battle A”, “Battle B”, and “Battle C” are described in the effect names included in the “SP2” type. “A” to “C” in “SP1” and “SP2” distinguish characters and scenes displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when each winning effect is executed.

  In addition, the “war history” in FIG. 186 is a category indicating a combination of winning effect allocations, and which battle history allocation is used is selected based on the appearance status of the winning effect as the game progresses. Is done. Referring to FIG. 186 in detail regarding the allocation of the winning effect, for example, when “war history P” is used, the peripheral control is performed based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the outlier pattern is received from the main control board 4100. The winning effect determined by the MPU 4140a is that the “normal” winning effect (normal reach) is selected in 30 of the denominator 100 (ie, 30%), and the “long” winning effect is selected in 14 (14%). The effect (long reach) is selected, and the winning effect (story A reach) of “Story A” is selected with 20 distributions (20%) (corresponding to distribution “X1-P” in FIG. 186). In the distribution “X1-P”, it is the normal reach that is most easily selected among all the winning effects, and the winning effect (battle C reach) of “Battle C” is the hardest to be selected. Further, the winning effect determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the low hit pattern is received from the main control board 4100 is “1” in the denominator 100 (1%). The “normal” winning effect (normal reach) is selected, the “3” allocation (3%) is the “long” winning effect (long reach), and the “3” allocation (3%) is the “story A” winning effect. A production (story A reach) is selected (corresponding to the distribution “Y1-P” in FIG. 186). In the distribution “Y1-P”, the winning effect (battle C reach) of “Battle C” is the most easily selected among all winning effects. Further, in the battle history P of FIG. 186, the distribution of the high hit pattern (corresponding to the distribution “Z1-P” of FIG. 186) is set to be the same as the distribution of the low hit pattern “Y1-P”. The same applies to the winning effect determined in the case of the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the high hit pattern.

  In FIG. 186, at least a part of the allocation of the winning effect selected at the time of winning (big hit) is set different for each battle history. Here, as an example, the combination of allocation as the initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is “war history P”, and “war history Q”, and further “war history” based on the execution of a specific winning effect that stops at the outlier symbol arrangement. Assume that the selection destination shifts to “R”. For each lottery result of the special lottery, when the battle history selection destination is “war history Q”, the “X1-Q” is assigned when “off”, the “Y1-Q” is assigned when “low hit”, “ At the time of “high hit”, the distribution “Z1-Q” is used. Also, when the battle history is selected as “war history R”, the distribution “X1-R” is “off”, the distribution “Y1-R” is “low hit”, and the distribution “Z1” is “high hit”. -R "is used. Then, as a specific example of the transition condition to which the battle history selection destination shifts, once the “Battle A” win effect is selected at the time of “out of” (that is, when the out-of-balance Battle A reach appears), Each time a selection is made, the selection destination shifts from “war history P” to “war history Q” and then “war history R”, and after the selection destination becomes “war history R”, until the big win is won. It is assumed that the selection destination is not changed from “war history R”. Below, what kind of effect pattern is selected when FIG. 186 is used in accordance with such a battle history transition condition will be described.

  First, in the case of “war history P”, which is the selection destination of distribution in the initial setting, the ratio of the battle A reach being selected among the offending effect patterns is 12%, and the battle among the winning effect patterns is The rate at which A reach is selected is 8%. The liquid crystal display device 1900 displays (appears) the battle A reach in response to the display command based on the selected winning effect (including the effect pattern). In the case of the effect pattern that is a winning pattern, the decorative symbol stops variably in the big hit mode. The production pattern that is a hit includes a production pattern that shows a low hit and a production pattern that shows a high hit. In such a case, the decorative symbol normally stops variably in the big hit mode of the big hit, and in the case of the effect pattern showing the high hit, the decorative symbol stops variably in the big hit mode of the probable big hit. Alternatively, the same decorative symbol may be stopped at low hits or high hits to indicate whether the hit is low or high during the big hit game. By doing so, even if the result of the special lottery is a low hit, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a high win and play a big hit game.

  Here, the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 is used when the variation time is 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, the breakdown of the determination result when the variation time is 30 seconds is “ Out of range: “low hit”: “high hit” = 2: 1: 1, “out of”: “big hit” = 1: 1. Therefore, when the allocation table of FIG. 186 is used, the winning expectation degree for “low hit” and the winning expectation degree for “high hit” are 25%, respectively, and the winning expectation degree for “big hit” is 50%.

Further, by referring to the variation pattern table (FIG. 185) and the distribution table (FIG. 186), it is possible to calculate the degree of expectation for the big hit when a specific winning effect appears. The expected degree of jackpot when a specific winning effect appears can be calculated by the ratio of “the distribution per hit to which the appearance ratio is allocated” to “the total sum of each distribution to which the individual appearance ratio is allocated” . For example, considering the degree of expectation to the big hit when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, referring to FIG. 186, the low hit allocation is 8 (allocation Y1-P), and the high hit hit is The minute is 8 (assignment Z1-P), and the out-of-order assignment is 12 (assignment X1-P). From FIG. 185, the appearance ratio is 1 for low hit and 1 for high hit, but 2 for deviation. From the above, when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, the expected degree of jackpot is
[(8 × 1 + 8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100
It is shown that it is “40.0%” using the calculation formula.
In addition, regarding the expectation degree to the high hit when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, [(8 × 1) / ((8 × 1 + 8 × 1) + (12 × 2))] × 100
It is shown that it is “20.0%” using the calculation formula.

  In the following description, the expectation degree (reliability) of jackpot is calculated using the method as described above, but intermediate calculation formulas are omitted as appropriate.

  Next, when the battle A reach is selected in the battle history P, the peripheral control MPU 4140a did not win the big hit by a specific winning effect (in this case, the battle A reach) (in other words, the miss When a specific winning effect has been recorded) and the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the example in the later stage, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is “1”), the subsequent game Change the selection destination of the winning effect to “History Q”.

  Here, as a method of “recording a battle history” for recording that a big win was not won by a specific winning effect, for example, a predetermined flag (effect result storage flag) is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a. May update (add) the flag value. The update timing of the flag value with respect to the effect result storage flag is not limited to when the battle A reach is selected. For example, the display effect by the battle A reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the decorative design is out of the manner. It may be a stop timing, a stop timing of a special symbol in the game, or the like. In any case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the selection destination of the allocation in accordance with the flag value of the effect result storage flag that is rewritten based on the appearance of a specific winning effect (out of battle A reach). For example, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is “0”, the battle history P is selected, and when the flag value is updated (added) to “1”, the battle history Q is selected. Then, when the flag value is updated (added) to “2”, the strategy R may be selected. Further, the information stored at the time of “recording the battle history” is limited to a form such as a flag (effect result storage flag) whose value is changed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied as described above. is not. For example, a command or data that can specify a reach pattern corresponding to a specific winning effect may be stored, and the storage destination is not limited to the storage medium of the peripheral control board 4010. You may make it memorize | store over 4100 storage media, storage media, such as another board | substrate, or those plurality.

  In this example, information related to “record of battle history” is stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, but when information related to “record of battle history” is managed by the peripheral control board 4010 in this way. Since the peripheral control MPU 4140a can select the decoration pattern effect pattern based on the “record of battle history” under the condition that it is within the variation time of the special symbol indicated in the variation pattern of the special symbol, Various effects can be selected that do not correspond one-to-one with the variation pattern. As another example, when information related to “record of battle history” is managed by the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern of a special symbol based on “record of battle history”. It is also possible to change the variation time of the special symbol based on the “record of battle history”. Thus, for example, if the variation time of the special symbol is shortened, the time required for one game digestion is shortened, so that it is possible to improve the number of revolutions per unit time and increase the game efficiency. Further, for example, if the variation time of the special symbol is extended, it is possible to reduce the non-rotation period in which the symbol is not variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of extending the period during the game and making it difficult for the game to occur.

  In “war history Q”, compared with “war history P”, a part of the allocation in the winning production pattern is changed. With reference to FIG. 186, the specific change contents of the allocation are confirmed. The change of each allocation may be performed by comparing the allocation X1-P and the allocation X1-Q for the outlier pattern, and by comparing the allocation Y1-P and the allocation Y1-Q for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-P and the distribution Z1-Q may be compared. At this time, in the outlier pattern and the low hit pattern, even if the battle history P changes to the battle history Q, there is no change in the contents of the distribution. However, in the high hit pattern, among the SP1 type winning effects, the story A reach allocation is reduced by 2 from “3” to “1”, and the story B reach allocation is 2 from “5” to “3”. As a result, the distribution of Story C reach is reduced by 5 from “10” to “5”. In total, the allocation of winning effects (story A to C) for the entire SP1 type is “9” in strategy Q, but “9”, although it was “18” in battle history P. Furthermore, in the high hit pattern, among the SP2 type winning effects, the distribution of the battle A reach is increased by 9 from “8” to “17”, and the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 type is as follows: In the battle history P, “78” becomes “87” and increases by 9.

  Further, when the distribution by “war history Q” is compared with the case of “war history P” by the expectation degree (reliability) to the big hit when each winning effect appears, it is as follows. The reliability regarding each winning effect is calculated in the same manner as the reliability of the battle A reach described above.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (low hit and high hit combined) in "war history P" and "war history Q"
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 13.0% (6/46 × 100)
The reliability of Story B reach is 33.3% (10/30 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 62.5% (20/32 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 33.3% (36/108 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 40.0% (16/40 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (40/50 × 100)
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (100/106 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 79.6% (156/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44 × 100)
The reliability of Story B reach is 28.6% (8/28 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 55.6% (15/27 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 27.3% (27/99 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 51.0% (25/49 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 80.0%
The reliability of Battle C Reach is 94.3% (same as War History P)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 80.5% (165/205 × 100).

  In other words, when the “war history P” and “war history Q” are compared with respect to the degree of expectation for the big hit, in the “war history Q”, each winning effect (story A to C) and the type of SP1 type are compared with “war history P”. While the degree of expectation for jackpots in the whole decreases, the degree of expectation for jackpots in the SP2 type specific winning effect (Battle A) and the whole type improves. Moreover, the expectation degree to the big hit in the winning effects (battle B, C) other than the specific winning effect among the SP2 types does not change.

Such a change in the degree of expectation (reliability) is particularly noticeable at high hits. About the reliability of high hits (expectation to hit a high hit) in "war history P" and "war history Q"
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 6.5% (3/46 × 100)
Story B reach is 16.7% reliable (5/30 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 31.3% (10/32 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% (18/108 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 20.0% (8/40 × 100),
Battle B reach reliability is 40.0% (20/50 × 100),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (50/106 x 100)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 39.8% (78/196 × 100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 2.3% (1/44 × 100)
The reliability of Story B reach is 10.7% (3/28 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 18.5% (5/27 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% (9/99 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (17/49 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B Reach is 40.0%
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (same as P history)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 42.4% (87/205 × 100).

  In other words, when comparing “war history P” and “war history Q” with respect to the degree of expectation for high hits, “war history Q” includes SP1 type winning effects (story A to C) and Expectation for high hits in the whole category is greatly reduced. For example, the reliability per high of the SP1 type as a whole is 16.7% in the battle history P, but is reduced to 9.1% in the battle history Q. On the other hand, the specific winning effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the expectation for high hits in the whole type are greatly improved. For example, the reliability per battle A is high at 20.0% in the battle history P, but improved to 34.7% in the battle history Q. Moreover, the expectation degree to the high hit in the winning effects (Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effect among the SP2 types does not change as the expected degree for the big hit.

  Next, when the battle A reach is selected in the battle history Q, the peripheral control MPU 4140a did not win the big hit by the specific winning effect (in this case, the battle A reach) as in the battle history P. This is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (effect result storage flag). When the flag value of the effect result storage flag is updated (added) from “1” to “2” by this process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the selection destination of the winning effect allocation in the subsequent game as “war history R”. Change to

  In “war history R”, a part of the allocation in the winning effect pattern is further changed from “war history Q”. With reference to FIG. 186, the specific change contents of the allocation are confirmed. The change of each distribution may be performed by comparing the distribution X1-Q and the distribution X1-R for the outlier pattern, and by comparing the distribution Y1-Q and the distribution Y1-R for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-Q and the distribution Z1-R may be compared. At this time, in the outlier pattern and the low hit pattern, even if the battle history Q changes to the battle history R, the content of the distribution does not change. However, in the high hit pattern, among the SP1 type winning effects, the story A reach allocation remains “1”, but the story B reach allocation has decreased by 2 from “3” to “1”. Story C reach allocation decreased by 4 from “5” to “1”. In total, the allocation of winning effects (story A to C) for the entire SP1 type is “9” in the battle history P, but becomes “3” in the strategy Q and decreases by 6. Furthermore, in the high hit pattern, among the SP2 type winning effects, the allocation of the battle A reach is increased from “17” to “23” by 6, and the allocation of the SP2 type winning effects (battles A to C) is In the battle history P, “87” becomes “93” and increases by 9.

  At this time, similarly to the description of “war history P” and “war history Q”, the expectation (reliability) to the big hit when each winning effect appears in the distribution of “war history R”, and high Expectation to win (reliability) is as follows.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (low hit and high hit combined) in "war history R",
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44 × 100)
The reliability of Story B reach is 23.1% (6/26 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 47.8% (11/23 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 22.6% (21/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 56.4% (31/55 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (same as P and Q)
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (same as P and Q)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 81.0% (171/211 × 100).

  In other words, when comparing “war history Q” and “war history R” with respect to the degree of expectation for jackpot, in “war history R”, compared to “war history Q”, the SP1 type win effect (story B, C) and the overall type While the degree of expectation for jackpots at the time is reduced, the specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and the degree of expectation for jackpots at the whole type are improved. In addition, the reliability of winning effects (battle B, C) other than a specific winning effect among the SP2 types does not change.

In addition, regarding the reliability of high hits in “war history R”,
The reliability of Story A reach is 2.3%
The reliability of Story B reach is 3.8% (1/26 × 100)
The reliability of Story C reach is 4.3% (1/23 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 3.2% (3/93 × 100).
In addition, the reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (23/55 × 100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 40.0% (same as P and Q)
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (same as P and Q)
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 44.1% (93/211 × 100).

  In other words, when comparing “war history Q” and “war history R” with respect to the degree of expectation for high hits, “war history R” and SP history type wins (story B, C) and Expectation for high hits in the whole category is greatly reduced. For example, the reliability per high of the SP1 type as a whole is 9.1% in the battle history Q, but is reduced to 3.2% in the battle history R. On the other hand, the specific winning effect (Battle A) of the SP2 type and the expectation for high hits in the whole type are greatly improved. For example, the reliability per battle A is about 34.7% in the battle history Q, but has improved to 41.8% in the battle history R. Moreover, the expectation degree to the high hit in the winning effects (Battles B and C) other than the specific winning effect among the SP2 types does not change as the expected degree for the big hit.

  FIG. 187 is a table summarizing the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1A. Each column of FIG. 187 describes the reliability obtained by the calculation method as described above.

  In this way, by using the distribution table 1A illustrated in FIG. 186, a combination of distribution based on the fact that a specific winning effect (battle A reach) has appeared without being a big hit (out of line). In the subsequent game after the change, at least some winning effects (other winning effects: stories A to C) other than the specific winning effect are selected as the winning pattern (strictly, the high winning pattern). While the distribution can be kept low, it is possible to increase the distribution in which a specific winning effect is selected as a winning pattern (strictly, a high winning pattern). Even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of the allocation selected by the off-line pattern is not changed. As a result, in the game after the change of the combination of assignments (war history), the expectation (reliability) for the big hit and the high hit when the "other winning effects" with the distribution kept low appears. While the reliability is lower than the reliability before the change, the reliability when the specific winning effect appears can be made higher than the reliability before the change.

  In addition, when the selection destination of the allocation combination (war history) shifts to a plurality of stages, the allocation change as described above is performed every time the selection destination shifts. It is possible to further increase the distribution of the effects selected in the hit pattern, and it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the big hit and the high hit when a specific winning effect appears.

[6-1-2. Distribution of production pattern with variation time of 30 seconds (part 2)]
FIG. 188 is a diagram (distribution table 1B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. A distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is another example of the distribution table of effect patterns that can be used in place of the distribution table 1A shown in FIG. Similar to the distribution table 1A, the distribution table 1B is a distribution table of effect patterns used when the variation time is “30 seconds” as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and each winning effect shown in FIG. The production time (decoration time of decoration pattern) is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern is 30 seconds, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, half (50%) of the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the variation time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. Note that the allocation of the winning effect shown in FIG. 188 is an example for simple explanation, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them out as necessary.

  The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is selected based on the fact that a battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific winning effect (battle A reach) appears out of the way as with the distribution table 1A. The previous battle history shifts from “war history P” to “war history Q” and “war history R”. The difference between the distribution table 1B and the distribution table 1A is a breakdown of the distribution accompanying the transition of the battle history, and will be specifically described below.

  In the allocation table 1B, when shifting from “war history P” to “war history Q”, in the high hit pattern, among the SP2 type winning effects, the distribution of the battle A reach that is “specific winning effect” is “ Increased by 15 from “8” to “23”, the distribution of Battle B reach, which is another winning effect of the SP2 type, decreased by 5 from “20” to “15”, and the distribution of Battle C reach from “50” Decrease by 10 to “40”. Note that the allocation of the winning effect (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 type in the high hit pattern remains “78”. Further, the allocation of the winning effects included in the normal type and the SP1 type, which are types other than the SP2 type (winning effect group), is not changed.

  Further, in the allocation table 1B, when shifting from “war history Q” to “war history R”, as in the case of shifting from “war history P” to “war history Q”, the allocation in the high hit pattern is changed. . Such a distribution change is performed only between the winning effects included in the SP2 type, and does not affect the winning effects included in the other types. Specifically, among the SP2 type winning effects in the high hit pattern, the “specific winning effect” battle A reach distribution is increased by 20 from “23” to “43”, and other SP2 type winning effects The distribution of battle B reach, which is the effect, is reduced by 5 from “15” to “10”, and the distribution of battle C reach is reduced by 15 from “40” to “25”. The allocation of the winning effect (battle A to C) of the entire SP2 type in the high hit pattern remains “78”, and the winning included in the normal type and the SP1 type, which are types other than the SP2 type (winning effect group). The distribution of the production is not changed.

  FIG. 189 is a table summarizing the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1B. The reliability of each column is calculated using the same calculation formula as in FIG. 187 in the case of the distribution table 1A, but detailed description is omitted.

  Referring to FIGS. 188 and 189, the reliability when each winning effect appears using the distribution table 1B has no change in the big hit for each type or the reliability for each hit, and the SP2 type specific It shows that the expectation for big hits and high hits in the hit effect (Battle A) is improved, while the expectation for big hits and high hits in other SP2 type win effects (Battle B, C) is reduced. It is. This feature appears more greatly by shifting from “war history P” to “war history R” via “war history Q”. Specifically, when the battle history is P, the reliability of the jackpot when a specific winning performance (Battle A reach) is revealed is 40.0%, but when the battle history is Q, it becomes 56.4%. Furthermore, the battle history R has improved to 68.0%. Moreover, the change in the degree of expectation for high hits is even more remarkable, and the reliability for high hits when the battle A reach is revealed is 20.0% for the battle history P, but when the battle history is Q It increases to 41.8% and doubles, and if it becomes the battle history R, it becomes 57.3%, and it improves to the reliability nearly 3 times compared with the battle history P. On the other hand, although the allocation of the high hit pattern of the same type of Battle B reach and Battle C reach, which is a specific winning effect, is suppressed, the reliability of the entire SP2 type changes with the transition of the battle history. Not.

  According to such a distribution table, the combination of distributions is changed based on the fact that a specific winning effect (Battle A) has appeared without being a big hit (out of line), and the subsequent changes after the change are made. In the game, at least some winning effects other than the specific winning effects (types of other winning effects in the same type: battles B and C) in the winning effect group (type) including the specific winning effects are the winning patterns. While the allocation selected in the (strictly high hit pattern) can be kept low, it is possible to increase the allocation selected in the hit pattern (strictly the high hit pattern) for the specific winning effect. Even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of the allocation selected by the off-line pattern is not changed. As a result, in the game after the change of the combination (war history) of the distribution, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the high hit when the “other winning effects in the same type” with a low distribution appears. While (reliability) is lower than the reliability before the change, it is possible to increase the reliability when the specific winning effect appears, than the reliability before the change.

[6-1-3. Characteristics of production patterns with a variation time of 30 seconds]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific winning effect is displayed in an out-of-phase manner, as described with reference to the distribution table 1A (see FIG. 186) and the distribution table 1B (see FIG. 188). The record of the battle history is recorded on the basis of what has been issued, and the combination of assignments is changed based on the record of the battle history (transition of the battle history), so that the specific winning effect appears after the shift of the battle history In this case, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased, and in particular, the degree of expectation for the high hit having a high advantage can be increased.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an effect pattern including a specific winning effect is selected and executed, and when the decorative symbol is detached and stops in the symbol array due to the winning effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the peripheral control RAM 4140e. For example, the “record of battle history” is stored to store the game result, and the player is informed of information related to the winning effect stored in the “record of battle history” (teaching of battle history). The teaching of the battle history is realized, for example, by displaying a predetermined image or the like that suggests that the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has shifted in a specific winning effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Is done. Then, the player is taught that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the winning effect related to the taught content is improved by teaching the battle history. Specifically, for example, when the battle history is taught in a manner that suggests the character “A” corresponding to the battle A reach (corresponding to a teaching area 1900a shown in FIG. 192 described later), the character “A” is strengthened. (A power up of the character) is shown, and the player who sees this can recognize that the expectation level of the big hit is high for the battle A reach that is the winning effect relating to the character “A”. That is, by teaching the battle history regarding Battle A, it is possible to recognize from the player that the character “A” is powering up, and a big hit is expected when the Battle A reach is revealed in subsequent games. Teach the situation that is easy to do. In order to supplement the recognition of the situation where the character “A” is powered up, characters such as “Character A being powered up” may be displayed (supplementary display in the power-up state). However, even when supplementary display in the power-up state is performed, it is an area that does not interfere with the display by the winning effect (battle A reach) (so-called “area where the player recognizes whether or not the battle A reach is hit”). It is desirable to be displayed in a non-overlapping area. Thus, by performing supplementary display of the power-up state in an area that does not disturb the display of the winning effect, both recognition of the powered-up character by the supplementary display and recognition of the winning result by displaying the winning effect are performed. Can be satisfied.

  The image data and the like used for teaching the battle history is stored in, for example, the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Appropriate image data is read out and drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A specific example of the teaching of the battle history will be described again in the next section. When a specific winning effect appears in the gaming situation in which such teaching is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player Since it can be recognized that the reliability of a specific winning effect is higher than in the past (for example, initial setting), it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for a big hit and to expect an improvement in interest.

  Also, when the battle history is taught as described above using the distribution table 1A in the liquid crystal display device 1900, other than the winning effects such as Battle B reach and Battle C reach, which have relatively high reliability from the beginning. In addition, even if a specific winning effect (battle A reach) occurs, the reliability is increased, so that the player has a higher expectation for the occurrence of the reach state. In addition, when the above-described battle history is taught using the distribution table 1B, the reliability of the winning effect such as the battle B reach or the battle C reach with relatively high original reliability is secured to some extent. As it is (for example, expectation degree 50% or more), even when a specific winning effect (battle A reach) included in the same type occurs, the reliability becomes high, so that the player is in a reach state. More expectation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it can be expected to improve the player's expectation regarding the progress of the game, and in the situation where the game history is taught, there is no need to end the game. It can also be expected to raise feelings and increase willingness to continue playing.

  The “specific winning effect” used in the above description is a winning effect (or may be read as an effect pattern including the winning effect) in which the distribution of the distribution can be increased in accordance with the transition of the battle history. For example, it is predetermined in the design stage. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “specific winning effect” may be a plurality of types of winning effects. Specifically, FIGS. 186 and 188 exemplify “war history P” to “war history R” focusing only on “battle A reach” as specific winning effects, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, “specific” The “winning effect” is not limited to one type of winning effect (or an effect pattern including the winning effect). For example, in the case where the battle A reach and the battle B reach are respectively “specific winning effects”, an embodiment in which a plurality of stages of battle history related to battle A are combined with a plurality of stages of battle history related to battle B is combined. Can be devised. And in the transition of battle history related to battle B, when using the allocation table 1A, as in the transition of battle history related to battle A, the allocation of stories A to C in the high hit pattern is reduced and the high hit pattern is used. The battle B may be increased. Further, when using the allocation table 1B, the allocation of the other winning effects (battles A and C) of the SP2 type in the high hit pattern is decreased to increase the allocation of the battle B in the high hit pattern. You can do it. At this time, as the teaching of the battle history, the teaching that the character A corresponding to the battle A and the character B corresponding to the battle B are powered up is performed.

  In addition, when a plurality of winning effects within the same type are to be recorded as “specific winning effects” by using the distribution table 1B, a record of each fighting history based on the appearance of each winning effect is as follows: It is assumed that the distribution of the allocation will be interfered, but the processing in such a case is not particularly limited, and the allocation can be changed flexibly as each winning effect appears and the battle history is recorded What should I do? To give a specific example, when the battle A reach and the battle B reach are respectively “specific winning effects”, when the battle history of Battle A is changed, the battle B is assigned to the battle B every time one stage is transferred. Decrease the reach allocation by “5”, decrease the battle C reach allocation by “3” and increase the battle A reach allocation by “8”. The distribution of the battle A reach may be decreased by “4”, the distribution of the battle C reach may be decreased by “3”, and the distribution of the battle B reach may be increased by “7”. The increase / decrease width at this time is not limited, and may be set as appropriate. FIGS. 190 to 192 to be described later show examples of screens in the case where the battle history shifts in each of the battles A to C reach. Further, the “specific winning effect” is not limited to the SP2 type battle reach, but may be another type of winning effect. In such a case, the same type as the winning effect (winning effect group) The distribution of other winning effects included in is suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning effects are set in advance as candidates for “specific winning effects”, and “specific winning effects” are selected from the target candidates according to the player's wishes. May be specified. As a specific operation of such designation, for example, an input screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with a predetermined operation of the player, and the player has performed an operation on the input screen. Decide on a “specific winning performance”. As an internal process, a distribution table for managing a change in distribution regarding the transition of the battle history related to each winning effect of the target candidate is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is selected by the player's operation. The distribution table used for selection of the winning effect may be determined based on the “specific winning effect”.

[6-2. Example of winning performance]
Here, with regard to the winning effects described in FIGS. 186 and 188, the contents of the effects will be described for each type of winning effect that is executed based on a special drawing variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. . The effects illustrated in the drawings are executed according to the effect pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displays on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the effect pattern.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the normal type winning effect is executed. FIGS. 190A to 190D schematically show effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. In FIG. 190 (A), teaching areas 1900a, 1900b, and 1900c are areas in which information relating to the winning effect of losing where the battle history is recorded is shown. Specifically, for example, the teaching area 1900a is an area for teaching (suggesting) that a battle history record regarding the battle A has been recorded based on the fact that the battle A reach has appeared out of place. Based on the record of the battle history by A reach, for example, an image that emits light in a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the letter “A”. Similarly, the teaching area 1900b is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the record of the battle history related to the battle B has been performed based on the fact that the battle B reach has appeared out of place, and the teaching area 1900c is a battle area. This is an area for teaching (suggesting) that the record of the battle history related to the battle C has been performed based on the fact that the C reach has appeared out of the way, and like the teaching area 1900a, “B” and “C” An image that emits light in a predetermined color can be displayed on the background of the characters. In FIGS. 190A to 190D, it is assumed that the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c are not particularly displayed with light emission, and specific emission colors and the like will be described later with reference to FIG.

  An image display area 1900d shown in FIG. 190 (A) is an area in which a decorative symbol pattern row, a winning effect image, and the like are displayed. For example, the arrow shown in the image display area 1900d means a decorative pattern that is fluctuating. In FIG. 190A, three arrows are shown in the image display area 1900d. The decorative design is changing in each row.

  A character display area 1900e shown in FIG. 190B is an area in which characters, symbols, and the like can be displayed in the image display area 1900d, and predetermined characters and the like are displayed according to the production status. For example, in FIG. 190B, as shown in the image display area 1900d as “7, arrow, 7”, the left and right rows of decorative symbols stop at the “7” symbol, and the middle row of decorative symbols changes Since it is in the middle state, a reach state is formed. At this time, the character “reach!” Is displayed in the character display area 1900e, so that the player can be surely notified of the formation of the reach state.

  190A to 190D and FIGS. 191A to 191 and 192A to 192 described later, teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, image display area 1900d, and character display Those denoted with the same symbols as those of the region 1900e indicate the same region, and the description thereof is omitted.

  When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 190 (B), an effect screen of a normal type of winning effect (normal reach or long reach) is displayed. Specifically, the decorative symbol in the middle row that is changing is stopped at any symbol after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the game result by the winning effect is displayed. When the game result is a win (big hit), since the effect pattern including the winning effect of the hit pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is shown in FIG. 190 (C). In this way, the same symbols (in this case, “7” symbols) as the decorative symbols in the left and right columns that have formed the reach state are stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the game has won a big hit. It should be noted that depending on the display rules for the jackpot symbol in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to be limited to the same symbol set. For example, a specific symbol indicating a jackpot may be stopped. When the big win is won as shown in FIG. 190C, the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  When the game result is out of order, an effect pattern including the winning effect of the out-of-pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, so that the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is as shown in FIG. In addition, the symbols (here, “2” symbols) different from the left and right rows of decorative symbols that have formed the reach state are stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that he / she could not win a big win in this game. When the big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 190 (D), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the game shifts to the next game.

  In addition, although normal reach and long reach were illustrated as the normal type of winning effect, the difference between the two is distinguished by, for example, the law of decorative symbols that stop in the middle row, and in the case of long reach, the middle row that stops at the end The decorative design of No. is a design that is numerically or arrayally similar to the design that formed the reach state (for example, 1 to 2 frames before and after), and in the case of normal reach, the decorative design of the middle row that stops when it comes off It is assumed that the symbol that is in the reach state is a symbol that is numerically or arrayally distant. Thus, by making the behavior in the long reach different from the normal reach, it can be expected that the player has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the normal reach. However, as shown in FIG. 190, the normal type of winning effect is not such that a special effect screen is displayed after the reach state is formed, and the degree of expectation for the big hit is the SP1 and SP2 types described later. It's not as expensive as the current production.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the SP1 type winning effect is executed. FIGS. 191 (A) to (G) schematically show effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900. FIGS. 191 (A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 190 (A) and (B). Since this is the production screen, the description is omitted.

  When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the SP1 type winning effect (story A reach, story B reach, or story C reach) effect screen is displayed. Here, “story reach”, which is the SP1 type of winning effect, is one type of super reach, and a special winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 191 (C) is displayed, and the types of winning effects “A” to “A” are displayed. Different effects such as a character and a traveling route are performed corresponding to “C”. More specifically, first, the decorative symbol variation display that has been displayed in the image display area 1900d until FIG. 191B is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and the image display area 1900d includes A screen appears as if the character is moving towards the goal. Since FIG. 191 (C) illustrates the story reach A, the character “A” is drawn. In such a story reach production screen, a hole (a striped portion in FIG. 191 (C)) is drawn at the destination of the character “A”, and the character “A” can reach the goal through the hole. Whether or not the game result is a big hit is suggested depending on whether or not.

  Thereafter, the story A reach effect screen transitions to the effect screen shown in FIG. 191 (C), and when the game result is a win (big hit), the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a win pattern win effect. Since the pattern is selected, an effect screen indicating that the character “A” has successfully reached the goal is drawn as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. At the same time, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, “7” symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the arrangement of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed large in the image display area 1900d, and the player has won the big hit in this game. Be made recognizable. When the big win is won as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

  When the game result is out of order, an effect pattern including a winning effect of the out-of-pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191 (F). In addition, an effect screen is drawn which indicates that the character “A” is fit in the hole and cannot reach the goal. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7, 5, 7”) other than the big hit is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the matching pattern of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and it was not possible to win a big hit in this game (disconnected) ) Can be recognized by the player. When the big win is not won as shown in FIG. 191 (G), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the game shifts to the next game.

  Note that the SP1 type winning effects (story A to C) can be calculated from the distribution shown in FIG. 186, for example, at least in the initial setting (war history P), the reliability is in the order of story A, story B, story C. Is set high. Therefore, by making the character “B” rather than the character “A” and the character “C” more useful than the character “B” appear as useful characters, even if it is the same SP1 type winning effect, the player has different expectations Can be held. In addition, the expectation level (reliability) for the SP1 type of winning effect is higher than the reliability of the normal type of winning effect as described above. It is preferable that an effect screen to be obtained is drawn.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the SP2 type winning effect is executed. First, FIG. 192 (A) shows that the decorative design is changing in each of the left, middle, and right columns as in FIGS. 190 (A) and 191 (A). 1900b is shown in a different pattern from the teaching area 1900c.

  Here, in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the display of the background changes based on the fact that the battle history is recorded when the corresponding specific winning effects (battle A to C reach) are displayed in an out-of-phase manner. Yes (change in power-up display). For example, if the battle history transition stage for each of battles A, B, and C is four stages including the initial setting, the background color is “white” in the first stage of the initial setting and the background in the second stage of the next stage. The color is “blue”, the background color is “green” in the third stage of the next stage, and the background color is “red” in the fourth stage of the next stage. The hatched pattern in the teaching area 1900a in FIG. 192A indicates “green”, the satin pattern in the teaching area 1900b indicates “blue”, and the plain pattern in the teaching area 1900c indicates “white”. In addition, the lattice pattern of the teaching area 1900a shown in FIGS. 192 (F) and 192 (G) shows “red”. In other words, in FIG. 192 (A), the battle history related to Battle A is shifted to the third stage, the battle history related to Battle B is shifted to the second stage, and the battle history related to Battle C is the first stage which is the initial setting. I understand. If this state is described as the power-up state of each character, the character A and the character B are in a power-up state. However, character A is more powerful. It should be noted that the display at each stage in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c as described above basically corresponds to the selection destination of the internal distribution table selected as the combination of the distribution of the production pattern including the winning production. ing.

  Next, in FIG. 192 (B), when the reach state with the symbol “7” is formed, the SP2 type winning effect (Battle A reach, Battle B reach, or Battle C reach) effect screen is displayed. Here, “Battle Reach”, which is a SP2 type of winning effect, is one type of super reach, and a dedicated winning effect screen as shown in FIG. Different effects, such as a character and a battle format, are performed corresponding to “C”. More specifically, first, the decorative symbol variation display displayed in the image display area 1900d until FIG. 192B is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and the image display area 1900d includes A screen in which the ally character battles with the enemy character is displayed. Since FIG. 192 (C) exemplifies battle reach A, a teammate character “A” is drawn. In such a battle reach production screen, the teammate character “A” confronts the enemy character (“Z” in FIG. 192 (C)), and it is suggested whether or not the game result is a big hit depending on whether or not it can win. The A gauge area 1900g in FIG. 192 (C) is a display area indicating the physical strength of the enemy character, and indicates that the smaller the shaded portion, the weaker the enemy character is damaged. The enemy character “Z” is another character (for example, an enemy character “X” that looks weak, an enemy character “Y” that looks strong, etc.) depending on the type of battle reach and the battle history in the game. May be drawn.

  In FIG. 192 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed more emphasized than usual based on the effect of the battle A reach being a “specific winning effect” in which the battle history is recorded. . By highlighting the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the winning effect that appears in this way, it is clear that the player is executing the effect pattern by the “specific winning effect” in which the battle history is recorded. Since the reliability of the battle A reach at this time is higher than the initial setting, an effect of remarkably enhancing the interest of the player can be expected. In addition to visually emphasizing the teaching area 1900, the player may be made aware of the appearance of the battle A reach, which is a “specific winning effect”, by voice or character display. In addition, on the effect screen when the teaching area 1900a is highlighted, the teammate character “A” is drawn with an appearance different from the normal battle A reach (for example, a display mode as if the surrounding area is emitting light). In this way, it may be taught that a special performance is in progress.

  Thereafter, the battle A reach production screen transitions to the production screen shown in FIG. 192 (C), and when the game result is a win (big hit), the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a win pattern win effect. Since the pattern has been selected, an effect screen showing that the teammate character “A” has won the enemy character “Z” is rendered as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192 (D). The In the gauge area 1900g, a state in which the hatched portion disappears is drawn. At the same time, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit (for example, “7” symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the arrangement of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is displayed large in the image display area 1900d, and the player has won the big hit in this game. Be made recognizable. When the big win is won as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. When the big hit is reached in the battle A reach, the background color in the teaching area 1900a is returned to the initial setting of “white” as an example of the battle history recording method and the teaching method, and the battle history recording related to the battle A is deleted ( On the other hand, the background color in the teaching area 1900b remains the current “blue” and a record of the battle history regarding Battle B is left.

  When the game result is out of order, an effect pattern including a winning effect of the out-of-pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192 (F). In addition, an effect screen indicating that the teammate character “A” has been defeated by the enemy character “Z” is rendered. At the same time, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7, 6, 7”) other than the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the arrangement of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and it was not possible to win a big hit in this game (disconnected). ) Can be recognized by the player. When the big win is not won as shown in FIG. 192 (G), after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the game shifts to the next game.

  In FIG. 192 (F), the battle A reach, which is a “specific winning effect”, appears in an out-of-phase manner, so that the condition for recording the battle history related to the battle A reach is satisfied. At this time, as shown in an example in FIG. 192 (F), the background color of the teaching area 1900a is a diagonal pattern (in the third stage) as if the defeat result (war history) of “A” is recorded. “Green”) is changed to a lattice pattern (“red” in the fourth stage). Along with the transition of the battle history stage regarding the battle A, the selection destination of the combination related to the allocation of the winning effect of the winning pattern (the selection destination of the battle history in the allocation table) is also shifted. In subsequent games, a teaching area 1900a that teaches recording of a battle history related to battle A is displayed in a grid pattern on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. Further power-up) When the battle A reach appears again, it is possible to suggest to the player that the winning effect is more reliable.

  In addition, the SP2 type winning effects (battles A to C) can be calculated from the distribution shown in FIG. 186, for example, at least in the initial setting (war history P), the reliability is in the order of battle A, battle B, and battle C. Is set high. Therefore, by making the teammate character “B” than the teammate character “A” and the teammate character “C” appear more useful (strong) characters than the teammate character “B”, the same SP2 type of winning effect can be obtained. However, it can make players have different expectations. In addition, since the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit by the SP2 type winning effect is higher than the reliability by the normal type and the SP1 type winning effect as described above, the impression is more special than these other winning effects. It is preferable that an effect screen that can hold the image is drawn.

  As described with reference to the distribution table 1B in FIG. 188, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the battle A reach, which is a specific winning effect, is displayed in a manner that does not reach the big hit. The battle history record and transition for Battle A are performed, but if the battle history transition for Battle A proceeds in multiple stages, the reliability of the big hit (and high hit) when the Battle A reach appears is the same type It may be higher than other winning effects (for example, battle B reach) of a certain SP2 type. When the reliability of a specific winning effect (battle A reach) is increased so that the order of reliability in the initial setting is changed in this way, the friend character “A” is displayed as the friend character “A” when the battle A appears. A special effect effect that makes it appear as if it is a character more powerful than “B” may be performed, and as a result, it can be expected to invite the player's expectation with respect to the battle A in which the reliability is greatly increased. In addition, when the battle history regarding Battle A shifts to a high level and the reliability increases, while the distribution regarding Battle B decreases and the reliability decreases, the teammate character “A "" Is displayed in a power-up mode, and the teammate character “B” may be displayed in a mode that is weaker than usual (power-down). By performing such display, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the battle A reach corresponding to the teammate character “A”.

[6-3. Another example of winning performance]
As described above, the selection of the effect pattern including the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment and the features at the time of execution have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above example. It may be realized by example.

  First, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting of the transition condition between the battle histories and the number of distributions in each battle histories are not limited to the exemplified conditions. For example, as a transition condition between battle histories, the transition may be made when a specific winning effect in the off mode appears a specified number of times, and this specified number of times may be set to a different number between battle histories. . In addition to this, for example, when a battle A is appearing at the time of a loss, a so-called “look-ahead hold” is performed for a hold based on a game ball winning at the start port 2101 (this (When the expectation degree of the big hit for the hold is increasing), the battle history may be shifted to two steps at a time instead of the one-step shift of the battle history as described above. In such a case, it is desirable to set the degree of expectation for the jackpot after the transition of the battle history to a value higher than the degree of expectation (eg, 50%). In addition, the number of battle history settings is not limited, and “war history S” or a battle history as a further transition destination may be set as a transition destination ahead of “war history R” shown in FIGS. 186 and 188. .

  Further, for example, in the illustrations of FIGS. 186 and 188, it is described that the allocation is set in advance for each battle history, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, satisfies a predetermined transition condition. In such a case, the distribution number of a specific winning effect may be adjusted according to a predetermined rule or probability. Specifically, for example, when an out-of-balance Battle A reach is selected and the battle history transition condition is satisfied, the distribution of the SP1 type winning effect in the high hit pattern is subtracted from “0” to “5”, respectively. , “9” may be added to the allocation at the time of the battle A reach. However, from the viewpoint of efficiently performing internal processing, it is more preferable that the total value of the subtraction numbers for distribution and the total value of the addition numbers are set to be the same.

  In the above-described embodiment, the background color of characters such as “A” to “C” is selected as the selection destination in the teaching area where teaching based on the record of the battle history is performed (teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIGS. 190 to 192). However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not limit the teaching mode based on such a record of the battle history to the background color. For example, the battle history of the selected destination The display method (size, color, etc.) of characters such as “A” to “C” that can change the display method (size, brightness, etc.) of the corresponding teaching area or suggest a specific winning effect with the transition of May be changed. As another example of a method for teaching a battle history, a character (for example, character “A” to character “C”) corresponding to a winning effect to be recorded in the battle history appears in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, the winning effect in which the battle history is recorded may be suggested. In any case, it is only necessary to perform a display (such as an enhanced display of “A” or a power-up display of the character “A”) capable of recognizing a correspondence relationship to a specific winning effect (for example, battle A reach).

  As for the timing of teaching the battle history, in the example of FIG. 192, the latest battle history status is always displayed in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, but is not limited to the above. When the recorded specific winning effect appears next time, the history of the battle related to the specific winning effect may be taught at an arbitrary timing in the display process on the effect screen. In such a case, the player is notified when the game history is taught that the game is a game in which a winning effect with improved reliability is performed based on the record of the battle history. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of rapidly increasing interest in games and having a sense of expectation for big hits and high hits. In addition, for example, when a plurality of winning effects are targeted for “recording of battle history”, it is not necessary to perform “teaching of battle history” with respect to all target winning effects, and it is limited to winning effects with higher appearance frequency. Alternatively, it may be possible to perform only “teach history” related to the winning effect of the target that appeared during the previous or past predetermined number of games, or to realize various controls.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to display the teaching based on the record of the battle history in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set to be selectable by the player. , Providing game effects according to the player's preference, such as wanting to enjoy the results while obscure whether the reliability is high due to the record of the battle history when a specific winning effect appears be able to. By enabling “teaching of the battle history” in various ways as described above, it is possible to further enhance the playability.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the battle history is recorded based on the fact that the specific winning effect appears out of sync, and the selection destination of the distribution combination shifts (shift of the battle history), so that Although the description has been given of increasing the reliability of the big hit and the high hit when a specific winning effect appears in the game, such a battle history transition condition and maintenance condition are not limited to the above example. For example, the transition condition of the selection destination may not be a case where a specific winning effect is continuously displayed in an out-of-phase manner, and the record of the battle history or the shift of the battle history may not necessarily be performed every time. In addition, when a specific winning effect appears in a predetermined manner more than a certain number of times within a predetermined period, the battle history selection destination may be shifted, and as described above, other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The selection destination may be shifted based on the above.

  In addition, to give a specific example of the transition of the battle history when a plurality of winning performances are to be recorded in the battle history, the battle A reach appears in an out-of-phase manner, and the battle history related to Battle A is recorded. After the power-up display of the character “A” as the corresponding battle history teaching, when the battle B reach appears in an out-of-phase manner, regardless of whether or not the battle history is recorded based on the appearance of the battle B reach, It is preferable that the power-up state of the character “A” is left. By controlling in this way, the power-up state of the character “A” is not erased by the appearance of the battle B that is felt to be irrelevant, so the expectation for the battle A is expected even after the battle B reach is revealed. A sense of security that the feeling can be maintained can be provided to the player. Then, when the battle history teaching corresponding to the battle B (power-up of the character “B”) is separately performed by the deviated battle B reach, the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  An example of a battle history transition condition in which a battle history transition is not always performed when a specific winning effect that is the target of a battle history appears out of the record, and a battle history record of a battle history is recorded. This will be described using the distribution table 1A shown in FIG. Specifically, it is assumed that when an outlier battle A reach appears in the battle history P, it shifts to the battle history Q with a probability of 1/2 (50%). It is assumed that the battle history R is transferred with a probability of 1/5 (20%). As described above, even if the battle history is not necessarily transferred even if the battle history is recorded, even if the battle history is deviated, it corresponds to the battle A reach when the battle history is taught. Since it can be expected that an effect that character “A” powers up will be executed, even if a specific winning effect is lost, whether or not the battle history is transferred It is possible to direct the enjoyment and expectation of the user and to improve the game play. Furthermore, if the transition condition from the battle history P to the battle history Q (50% probability) is set to be stricter than the transition condition from the battle history Q to the battle history R (probability 20%), the first stage (initial stage) to the first stage Since it becomes relatively easy to shift to the second stage, it is easy to teach the battle history such as power-up of the character “A”. As a result, an opportunity to provide a special state that the character is powering up can be increased, so that it can be expected to increase the interest of the player and promote the operation.

  Further, the information stored in the “record of battle history” may be partly or entirely deleted as appropriate by the peripheral control MPU 4140a or the like when a predetermined condition is satisfied as the battle history shifts. Thus, by erasing the information stored in the “record of battle history”, it is possible to suppress the excessive holding of data that has no opportunity to be used, and the effect of suppressing a decrease in processing capability can be expected.

  One of the opportunities to erase information about the record of the battle history is to reset the battle history. The reset of the battle history is to return the battle history to the initial state with a predetermined game result as a trigger. As a condition for resetting the battle history, for example, a case where a jackpot is won may be considered. However, the battle history may be reset to the initial setting at the time of winning a predetermined jackpot (for example, a high hit) next time. It may be possible to maintain the battle history of the transition destination until winning a predetermined jackpot with a specific winning effect, or when winning a predetermined jackpot with a specific winning effect, the battle history is returned by a predetermined stage. May be selected. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when winning a big hit, it is not necessary to reset all the battle histories. Specifically, for example, when the characters “A” and “B” are powered up (when the battle history is taught for the battles A and B), the battle A reach reaches a high hit. Only the battle history related to battle A may be reset to the initial state to release the power-up state of the character “A”, and the battle history related to battle B may be maintained and the power-up state of the character “B” may be left. When controlling in this way, it is unreasonable that a player can hold by losing the power-up state of an irrelevant character “B” even though the jackpot was won in the battle A reach related to the character “A”. It can suppress feelings. And even after the big hit, since the player's expectation can be maintained for the appearance of the battle B reach related to the character “B”, the effect of promoting the continuation of the game can be expected. As another example, when winning a low hit by a specific winning effect, the battle history may be maintained without being reset. The player can more appropriately experience the effects of the present embodiment that can be enhanced.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function of performing opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2103 similar to that at the time of the big hit (so-called small hit) even though a special lottery result different from the big win is obtained. If it is, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not erased even if the small hit is executed. Moreover, even if the game is shifted to a special game period (for example, an advantageous period such as a chance zone) triggered by a small hit, it is preferable that information regarding the record of the battle history is not erased. By performing such control, even if it is as if the gaming state has been changed from the player's viewpoint, information regarding the record of the battle history will be changed if the internal gaming state has not been changed. Therefore, the player can maintain his / her battle history until he / she wins a special benefit, such as by winning a jackpot, and the player can experience the degree of contribution by recording his / her battle history to improve his / her expectation for the jackpot You can expect

  In addition, when the change of assignment is repeatedly performed due to the transition of the battle history, it can be assumed that the assignment value for a certain winning effect will be “0”. In order to avoid such a situation, A minimum threshold value may be defined in advance and control may be performed so as not to fall below the threshold value. If the allocation of the winning effect becomes “0”, the winning effect is not selected, so the selection range of the winning effect may be reduced and the gameability may be impaired. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to realize the transition of the battle history that changes the degree of expectation to the big hit (high hit) while securing the types of winning effects that can be selected. In addition, from the viewpoint of the player, while there is no change in the situation where various winning effects are provided, there is an effect that the interest is enhanced when a specific winning effect appears. Similarly, the upper limit value of the distribution value for a specific winning effect may be controlled by a threshold value.

  Also, in this embodiment, based on the fact that a specific winning effect (for example, Battle A reach) has appeared in a non-winning manner (out of line), in the subsequent games, the specific winning effect at the time of high hitting By increasing the number of minutes, the expectation for the big hit (high hit) when the specific winning effect is displayed can be increased. However, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific winning is achieved. The method of increasing the degree of expectation for high hits when the production (battle A reach) appears is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that a specific winning effect (for example, Battle A reach) has been displayed in a non-winning manner (out of the game), in the subsequent games, the specific winning in the “out of time” and “at the time of low hit” You may make it raise the expectation degree to the high hit when the said specific winning effect appears relatively by reducing the distribution of the production. However, if you change the allocation of wins, you can increase the chances of a game that wins a big win with a specific win production. Improvement can be further promoted.

[6-4. For fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times]
In the description so far, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of, for example, 30 seconds is selected, the decorative pattern effect pattern (based on the variation pattern ( It has been described how to determine (winning production). However, as illustrated in FIG. 185, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern having a plurality of types of variation times, and a variation pattern different from the variation time of 30 seconds (for example, the variation time of 60 seconds) is selected. In such a case, the effect pattern determination process as described above cannot be performed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern (a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific performance (for example, battle A reach) to appear. Even if it is selected, a “specific effect” can be displayed by executing an “alternative effect” which will be described in detail later. Below, such a control process is demonstrated. The “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is “variation pattern of special symbol with 60 seconds variation time (special symbol variation pattern)”.

  In the following, the allocation of the winning effect determined based on the “special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds” will be described, but the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has such a “variation time of 60 seconds. The process in the case of “special symbol variation pattern” and the processing in the case of “special symbol variation pattern with variation time of 30 seconds” described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3] Can be configured. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation pattern is 30 seconds, the distribution table 1A described in [6-1-1] (FIG. 186) or the distribution table described in [6-1-2]. 1B (FIG. 188) is used, and when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds, the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) of [6-4-1] described later, or [6-4- 2] of the distribution table 2B (FIG. 194) may be used.

[6-4-1. Distribution of production pattern with variation time of 60 seconds (part 1)]
FIG. 193 is a diagram (distribution table 2A) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is an effect pattern distribution table used when the change time is “60 seconds” as the change pattern of the special symbol, and the effect time of each winning effect shown in FIG. (Decoration time of decorative pattern) is within 60 seconds. Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 185, the rate of selection of a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds based on the special lottery result is 15/100 in the case of “out of”, and “low hit” Or, in the case of “high hit”, 60/100 respectively. From another viewpoint, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the ratio of each determination result is “out of”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 15: 60: 60 = 1: 4 : 4, 11.1% (1/9) is “out of”, and 88.9% (8/9) is a big hit (low hit or high hit). In other words, when the winning effect is distributed using the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193, the result of the special lottery is 11.1% is “out”, “88.9%” is a big hit, and The variation time of the special symbol is “60 seconds”. Note that the allocation of the winning effect shown in FIG. 193 is an example for the sake of brevity, and does not limit the type and type of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can read them out as necessary.

  Each item (type, production name, battle history, etc.) of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is the same as that of the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 and the distribution table 1B of FIG. “SP3” is provided in the “type” of the distribution table 2A. The winning effect included in “SP3” generally corresponds to the winning effect called “super reach”, and the expectation for the big hit is set particularly high in the super reach. In the “SP3” type winning effect, as an example, in the same way as the “SP2” type winning effect, the effect based on the battle type progresses in a longer variation time than the SP2 type, and depending on the progress result, it is not a big hit (and its type). Is displayed in a recognizable manner. And there are six winning effects included in the SP3 category ("Long Battle A", "Long Battle A '", "Long Battle B", "Long Battle B'", "Long Battle C", "Long Battle C '" ”), But if classified according to the characteristics of the production content (for example, characters A to C selected as teammate characters at the time of the battle production),“ Long A ”,“ Long B ”, and“ Long C ”3 Can be divided into types.

  Among the SP3 types of winning effects, an outline of the effects of the two types of winning effects that are classified into the same type of long (here, Long B), such as Long Battle B Reach and Long Battle B 'Reach. explain. First, whether or not both reach included in the long B is a big hit depending on whether or not the ally character and the enemy character can fight against each other and win the enemy character in the same manner as the battle B reach described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 188. The battle-type reach effect shown is basically a character B selected as a teammate character. However, the battle period (fluctuation time) of the battle B reach is 30 seconds or less, while the long B reach is set to 60 seconds or less. Here, in the long battle B reach, the character B is the central character through the reach production, whereas in the long battle B 'reach, the overall production content is similar to the long battle B reach, but the reach It is characterized in that it is switched (changed) to another production content different from the long battle B reach at any timing of the production. The effect contents to be switched are effects based on the record of the battle history. Specifically, for example, when “Battle A's record of battle history” is performed based on the appearance of Battle A reach in an outlier manner, long battle B ′ reach is executed. While the same (or similar) effect as Battle B reach is in progress, the same (or similar) effect as the “Battle A reach” effect appears based on “Record of battle history related to Battle A” . Similarly, if “Long Battle C ′” is selected when “Record of Battle History for Battle A” is performed, the battle history is in progress while the same (or similar) performance as Long Battle C reach is in progress. Based on this record, the same (or similar) effect as the “Battle A reach” effect appears. As described above, although the long battle B 'reach and the long battle C' reach are the types of winning effects of long B or long C, at least a part of the effects is a specific effect based on the record of the battle history (battle A This is a production substituted for the production of reach) and can be called “alternative production”. The detailed effect screen of “alternative effect”, its screen transition, and the like will be described later in [6-5].

  Note that, in the same manner as described in [6-2] with reference to FIG. Even when the SP3 type winning effect appears as the decorative symbol variation display based on the second variation pattern, the “teaching of the battle history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Specifically, for example, when a battle history record related to Battle A reach is recorded, “teach battle history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in such a manner that the battle A or the character A can be recognized. Further, in this state, when a long battle B 'reach or a long battle C' reach is executed, the same (or similar) performance as the battle A reach performance appears. It is preferable that highlighting is performed so that the player can surely recognize that the effect corresponding to the information (the effect of battle A reach) has appeared. Further, the display form of “teach history” may take various forms as in [6-2].

  In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the transition conditions of the battle history P, the battle history Q, and the battle history R are also the same as those of the distribution tables 1A and 1B shown in FIGS. 186 and 188, and “Battle A reach” is set. When the “specific win effect” is set, the battle history is recorded based on the appearance of the battle A reach out of the game, and the battle history selected in the distribution table 2A based on the record of the battle history. Will migrate.

  Next, in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the distribution of winning effects that is changed with the transition of the battle history will be described. The distribution of the battle history P (distribution X2-P, Y2-P, Z2-P) is an allocation used in the initial setting. In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, there is no distribution for the long battle A ′ as an example of the distribution table used when the “record of battle history regarding the battle A” is performed with the battle A reach as a specific winning effect. . In the initial battle history P, it is assumed that there is no distribution for the long battle B 'and the long battle C'.

  In the state where “war history P” is selected, the battle history regarding battle A is recorded, and when a predetermined battle history transition condition is satisfied, “war history Q” is selected when determining the winning performance. Become. In “war history Q”, as compared with “war history P”, in long B and long C, a part of the allocation in each pattern (disconnected, low hit, high hit) is changed.

  Specifically, according to the distribution pattern distribution X2-Q, the distribution of the long battle B reach is reduced by “3” in the long B and the long battle B ′ reach is compared to the distribution X2-P. The distribution increases by “3”. In the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is decreased by “3”, and the distribution of the long battle C ′ reach is increased by “3”. Further, according to the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach is reduced by “10” in the long B and the distribution of the long battle B ′ reach is compared with the distribution Y2-P. Increases by "10". In the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is reduced by “10”, and the distribution of the long battle C ′ reach is increased by “10”. Also, the high hit pattern allocation Z2-Q is increased or decreased by “10” in the same manner as the low hit pattern allocation Y2-Q. However, the total number of allocations for each type (long A, B, C) is not changed.

  As described above, in the distribution table 2A, the number of distributions for the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach decreases with the shift from the “war history P” to the “war history Q”, while the distribution is initially performed. The number of distributions for the long battle B ′ reach and the long battle C ′ reach that were “0” increases. However, the increase / decrease in the number of distributions is greater than the increase / decrease number in “out” (“3”). It is determined that there will be more.

  Next, in the state where “war history Q” is selected, the battle history regarding battle A is further recorded, and when a predetermined battle history transition condition is satisfied, “war history R” is selected when determining the winning effect. Will come to be. In “war history R”, compared to “war history Q”, a part of the allocation in each pattern (disconnected, low hit, high hit) is changed in long B and long C. This is the same as the change of the distribution contents when shifting from “war history P” to “war history Q”.

  As described above, as the shift from “war history P” to “war history Q” and further “war history R”, the number of allocations for the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach gradually decreases. The number of distributions for “0” long battle B ′ reach and long battle C ′ reach gradually increases. Furthermore, the difference between the number of increase / decrease of the allocation in “out” and the number of increase / decrease in the “big hit” gradually increases. That is, when the battle history selected based on the record of the battle history shifts, when the long B type winning effect is selected, the long battle B 'reach appears or the long C type winning effect is selected. Long battle C 'reach will come out when you do. When such a reach effect (long battle B ′, C ′) is executed, as described above, battle A, which is the target of the record of the battle history, during the progress of the effect content similar to the long battle B, C reach. A reach screen (or a screen related to Battle A reach) is displayed. That is, a variation pattern (for example, a long battle with a variation time of 60 seconds) that is different from a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with which a battle A reach can be selected with a variation time of 30 seconds) that allows a specific performance (battle A reach) to appear. Even if a variation pattern in which B can be selected is selected, the specific effect (battle A reach) can be made to appear by allowing an alternative effect (for example, long battle B 'reach) to appear.

  In addition, in each of the battle histories P, Q, and R, the expected degree (reliability) for the big hit (low hit or high hit) when each winning effect (reach effect) appears is as follows. Note that, as described above, each reliability is calculated in consideration of the appearance ratio of “off”: “low hit”: “high hit” = 1: 4: 4, but details of the calculation formula are omitted. . In addition, the reliability of reach production with the distribution of “0” is not described.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (low hit and high hit combined) in "war history P",
Long A (Long Battle A) reach reliability is 76.2% (160/210 × 100), Long B (Long Battle B) reach reliability is 88.9% (240/270 × 100), Long C (Long Battle C) Reach reliability is 95.2% (400/420 × 100)
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (800/900 × 100).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (low hit and high hit combined) in "war history Q",
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle B Reach is 85.6% (160/187 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B 'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 × 100),
The reliability of the entire long B is 88.9% (not different from the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C reach is 95.0% (320/337 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle C 'Reach is 96.4% (80/83 × 100),
The reliability of the entire Long C is 95.2% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (same as the battle history P).

Next, regarding the reliability of the big hit (low hit and high hit combined) in "war history R",
The reliability of Long A (Long Battle A) reach is 76.2% (the same as the battle history P),
Long Battle B Reach is 76.2% (80/105 × 100),
The reliability of Long Battle B 'Reach is 97.0% (160/165 × 100),
The reliability of the entire long B is 88.9% (not different from the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C reach is 94.1% (240/255 × 100),
Long battle C'reach is 97.0% (160/165 x 100),
The reliability of the entire Long C is 95.2% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (same as the battle history P).

  In this way, when transitioning from “war history P” to “war history Q” and further to “war history R”, the current directing (long battle B ′, C ′) with the newly added (increased) distribution appears. When it is issued, there is a low probability of being “out of place”, but it is possible to expect a big hit with a high probability (95% or more). That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A is used, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a battle A reach is achieved in a variation time of 30 seconds) that can produce a specific effect (battle A reach). Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern that can be selected (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B can be selected at a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, an alternative effect (for example, long battle B ′ reach) can be produced. Thus, the specific effect (Battle A reach) can appear, but such an alternative effect is selected when the degree of expectation for the big hit is high. In other words, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit when the battle history is being recorded, it is assumed that “a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a specific performance to appear” is selected. However, since the “alternative effect” is easily selected as the winning effect, the “specific effect” is likely to appear. Therefore, when a “specific performance” appears when a battle history is being recorded, a high degree of expectation for the big hit can be realized.

[6-4-2. Distribution of production pattern with variation time of 60 seconds (2)]
FIG. 194 is a diagram (distribution table 2B) for explaining the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. A distribution table 2B shown in FIG. 194 is another example of an effect pattern distribution table that can be used in place of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. The distribution table 2B is the same distribution table as the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193, except that the distribution contents accompanying the transition of the battle history are different. Omitted.

  The distribution table 2B in FIG. 194 differs from the distribution table 2A in FIG. 193 in the amount of distribution for the long battle B and the long battle C in the low hit pattern in the battle history Q and the battle history R. Specifically, in the allocation Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, the allocation amount for the long battle B reach is decreased by “5” compared to the allocation Y2-P in the low hit pattern of the battle history P. The distribution amount for the long battle C ′ reach is increased by “5”, the distribution amount for the long battle C reach is decreased by “5”, and the distribution amount for the long battle C ′ reach is increased by “5”. Furthermore, in the distribution Y2-R in the low hit pattern of the battle history R, the distribution amount for the long battle B reach is reduced by “5” compared to the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, and the long battle The distribution amount for B ′ reach is increased by “5”, the distribution amount for long battle C reach is decreased by “5”, and the distribution amount for long battle C ′ reach is increased by “5”. In both “war history Q” and “war history R”, the amount of allocation in the high hit pattern varies by “10” in the same manner as the allocation table 2A.

  As described above, in the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194, when the battle history shifts based on the record of the battle history related to the battle A (war history Q, R), the long battle B 'reach and the long battle C' in the low hit pattern. The amount of distribution to reach is made smaller than the amount of distribution to the reach in the high hit pattern. Similarly to the distribution table 2A, the increase / decrease number in the “big hit” (“5” in the battle history P to the battle history Q) is “5” which is the low hit in the “big hit” rather than the increase / decrease number in the “loss” (from the battle history P to the battle history Q). ”And“ 10 ”per high are defined as“ 15 ”). Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of increase / decrease in “out of” is determined to be at least larger than the number of increase / decrease in “per unit”. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses such a distribution table 2B, and in the same manner as when using the distribution table 2A, a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear. Even if a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B or long battle C is selected in variation time 60 seconds) different from (for example, a variation pattern in which battle A reach can be selected at variation time 30 seconds) is selected, An alternative production (for example, Long Battle B 'Reach or Long Battle C' Reach) can appear, so that the specific production (Battle A Reach) can be made to appear, and such an alternative production can be hit low. It can be easily selected in the case of high hit.

  As described above, the alternative productions (long battle B'reach, long battle C'reach) are easy to be selected when the high hits are higher than the low hits. Calculate and verify the reliability at the time of release.

  First, in “History P”, neither the long battle B ′ reach nor the long battle C ′ reach is distributed, and therefore is not displayed.

Next, in “Basis History Q”,
Long battle B 'reach has a big hit reliability of 95.2% (60 / 63x100)
Breakdown by jackpot
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 × 100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).
The long-hit C'reach jackpot reliability is 95.2% (60 / 63x100)
Breakdown by jackpot
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63 × 100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63 × 100).

Next, in the “war history R”,
The big hit reliability of Long Battle B 'Reach is 96.0% (120/125 × 100)
Breakdown by jackpot
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125 × 100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).
Long battle C'reach has a big hit reliability of 96.0% (120/125 × 100)
Breakdown by jackpot
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125 × 100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125 × 100).

  From the above calculated values, it is shown that when each substitute production appears, the expectation for the high hit is higher than the low hit, in other words, each substitute production is at the time of winning the high hit than at the low hit This is a winning performance that is easy to execute. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses such a distribution table 2B, and when the result of the special lottery is a high hit when the battle history is being recorded, the “specific production” Even if the “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern that can be displayed” is selected, the “alternative effect” is easily selected as the winning effect, so that the “specific effect” is likely to appear. Thus, when a “specific performance” appears when a battle history is being recorded, a high degree of expectation for high hits can be realized.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, with respect to the teaching of the battle history as described in [6-2], “variation pattern (battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) that can produce a specific effect varies. As described above in [6-3], the “variation pattern having different time (alternative effect having a variation time of 60 seconds)” is executed in the same manner as the “variation pattern having the same variation time”. Similarly, another example (a process relating to the timing of teaching the battle history, the resetting of the battle history, etc.) can be executed in the case of an alternative effect with a variation time of 60 seconds. Each example is omitted because it overlaps with the description in [6-3]. In particular, the opportunity to delete the information related to the record of the battle history is triggered by the fact that the alternative effect was selected and the game was a big hit. By erasing (or resetting) the information, it is based on the battle history even when “a variation pattern with a variation time different from the variation pattern that can produce a specific performance” is selected. It is possible to change the distribution of the production and to reflect in the battle history that it has reached the big hit by the production (alternative production), so to the big hit when a specific production appears based on the record and teaching of the battle history The characteristic effect of improving the degree of expectation can be provided more reliably.

[6-5. Alternative production production patterns]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which the battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds) that allows a specific performance (for example, battle A reach) to appear. Even if a different variation pattern is selected (for example, a variation pattern in which a SP3 type winning effect (long B, long C) can be selected in a variation time of 60 seconds), a specific effect based on the record of the battle history is substituted. "Alternative effects (for example, long battle B 'reach or long battle C'reach)" can be executed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by using a sorting table such as the sorting table 2A (FIG. 193) and the sorting table 2B (FIG. 194), the battle history is shifted based on the record of the battle history. If a big hit (or high hit) is won during the game, it will be easier to select such an alternative production, and the execution of the alternative production will allow a specific production with a recorded battle history to appear. Become. In the following, with respect to a specific effect pattern by such “alternative effect”, a specific effect will be described as an effect of battle A reach, and an alternative effect will be described as a long battle B ′ reach. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, alternative effects shown by the following effect patterns may be executed in combination, and an effect pattern that appears as an alternative effect is selected from among a plurality of effect patterns. It may be.

  In the above description, “Battle A Reach” has been specified as a specific effect. However, for the sake of more precise explanation, “Battle A Reach Effect (also referred to as“ Battle A Effect ”)” is specified hereinafter. Let it be a production. This “battle A reach production (battle A production)” is the reach state of the “series of battle A reach productions” from the start of the change of the decorative design to the stop of the decorative design through the formation of the reach state. It means an effect after the formation, and specifically corresponds to a battle-type effect in which the character A appears (for example, an effect after FIG. 192 (C)). That is, the battle A reach includes an effect (a pre-reach effect) and a battle A effect until a reach state is formed. As a display period of the battle A reach, for example, in FIG. 199 described later, the pre-reach effect appears for 8 seconds, and then the battle A effect appears for 22 seconds.

[6-5-1. First production pattern of alternative production]
First, as a first effect pattern of an alternative effect, an alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect will be described.

  FIGS. 195 and 196 are diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed. Each drawing of FIGS. 195 and 196 shows an example of a long battle B ′ reach effect screen that appears when a battle history record related to the Battle A effect is being performed, and FIGS. 195 (A) to (D). The above is an example of the effect screen that appears in the first half of the display period of the long battle B 'reach. Of the drawings of FIGS. 195 and 196, the description of the effect screens similar to those already described in FIGS. 190 to 192 is simplified, and such a description is also simplified in FIGS. 197 and 198 described later. To do.

  FIG. 195 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbol before the reach state is formed (pre-reach state), and FIG. 195 (B) shows the same decorative symbol (7 in the left column and the right column). The figure shows a state in which a reach state is formed by stopping. The display states of the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIG. 195A are the same as those in FIG. 192A. Specifically, when the battle history transition stage is set to four stages including the initial setting (first stage), the teaching area 1900a in which the record of the battle history related to the battle A effect is displayed is the third stage green, The teaching area 1900b where the record of the battle history related to the B effect is displayed is blue in the second stage, and the teaching area 1900c where the record of the battle history related to the battle C effect is displayed is white in the first stage.

  When the reach state is formed in FIG. 195 (B), the effect screen is displayed by the long battle B ′ reach. A battle A effect appears (FIG. 195 (C)). In FIG. 195 (C), the confrontation effect between the teammate character (character A) and the enemy character (character Z) is displayed. The details of the screen display and screen transition are shown in FIG. It may be the same as reach, and detailed description is omitted.

  Note that, as described in FIG. 192, also in FIG. 195 (C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed more emphasized than usual so that the battle A effect in which the battle history is recorded is performed. The player can clearly recognize (view) the player. Furthermore, since the reliability is enhanced when the production based on the record of the battle history appears, the reliability of the battle A production that appears here is higher than the initial setting, and the player It can be expected to significantly enhance the interest of

  Thereafter, a confrontation effect by the battle A effect is displayed in the image display area 1900d, and as a result, if the character A wins with a conclusion within a predetermined effect time (for example, 22 seconds), a victory screen is displayed ( (Drawing 195 (D)), when it cannot settle within progress of predetermined production time, the confrontation production by character A is continuously displayed (Drawing 196 (G)). Here, the predetermined effect time is a time until the first half of the display period of the alternative effect elapses, and is 22 seconds based on an example of a time chart (FIG. 197) described later. When the transition from FIG. 195 (C) to FIG. 195 (D) is made, the character A wins by the same confrontation effect as the battle A reach in the first half of the display period of the long battle B ′ reach, so that the battle A The production ends.

  In FIG. 195 (D), the character A wins in the image display area 1900d, and a decorative pattern (same as “7” in the figure) of the same pattern is displayed in the second image display area 1900d. However, the decorative design shown in the second image display area 1900d in FIG. 195D is not stopped and at least one decorative design is in a swinging state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 195 (E), the decorative design shown in the second image display area 1900d is displayed in the entire image display area 1900d. At this time, at least one decorative design is in a swinging state. Is done. In other words, the swinging state of the decorative symbols is maintained in the second half of the display period of the alternative effect, and after that, the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are stopped and displayed with the same symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the jackpot is won. (FIG. 195 (F)). As a result, the player can recognize from the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the game has won a big hit. When the big win is won as shown in FIG. 195 (F), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. In this way, the effect screen that transitions in the order of FIGS. 195A to 195 is displayed in the long battle B ′ reach of the big hit pattern.

  On the other hand, after the battle A effect is started (FIG. 195 (C)), when the conclusion is not reached within a predetermined effect time, the confrontation effect by the character A continues as shown in FIG. 196 (G). Displayed (extension effect of battle A). The extended effect of battle A is continuously displayed even after the second half of the display period of the alternative effect, and finally, the battle result of the victory or defeat of character A is displayed according to the result of the special lottery. FIG. 196 (H) is an example of the defeat screen of character A displayed when the result of the special lottery is out of order, and thereafter, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7, 5, 7”) other than the big hit is displayed. The display is stopped (FIG. 196 (I)). When the big win is not won as shown in FIG. 196 (I), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the game shifts to the next game. Such effect screens that transition in the order of FIGS. 195 (A) to (C) to FIGS. 196 (G) to (I) are displayed in the long battle B ′ reach of the off-line pattern.

  In the above description, in the long battle B ′ reach of the off-line pattern, the transition is made from FIG. 195 (A) to (C) to FIG. 196 (G), but according to the long battle A reach (see FIGS. 193 and 194). Such an effect screen may be displayed in the effect. At this time, even if the effect screen of FIG. 196 (G) is displayed without shifting to FIG. 195 (D) where the character A wins after FIG. 195 (C), there is a possibility that the effect screen of the long battle A reach is displayed. Therefore, the game result is not determined to be out of order, and the player can be prevented from giving up the game result. More specifically, when the long battle A reach of the big hit pattern appears, after the extended production of the battle A is displayed in FIG. 196 (G), the production screen in which the character A wins is displayed and the big hit Is shown. In addition, when the off-pattern long battle A reach or the off-pattern long battle B 'reach is selected, the effect screens of FIGS. 196 (H) to (I) are displayed, and the off-game result is confirmed. To do.

  Thus, by displaying the effect screen as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, it is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern that causes a specific effect to appear in the first half of the display period.

  Next, another example of the alternative effect by the first effect pattern will be described. FIGS. 197 and 198 are other diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed. Each figure of Drawing 197 and 198 has shown the example of a long battle B 'reach production screen which appears when the record of the battle history concerning Battle A production is performed, and Drawing 197 (A)-(D) The above is an example of the effect screen that appears in the first half of the display period of the long battle B 'reach. 197 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 198 (H) to (J) are the same effect screens as those of FIGS. 195 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 196 (G) to (I), respectively. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 197 and 198, as another example of the substitute effect by the first effect pattern, appear in a manner in which the character A wins the battle A effect in the first half of the display period of the long battle B ′ reach (alternate effect). An example of an effect screen is shown in which an effect screen (episode A) related to character A is displayed in the latter half of the subsequent display period. Specifically, when the big hit pattern B 'reach is selected, after the character A wins the character Z in FIG. 197 (D), over the latter half of the display period, FIG. As shown in (F), episode A is displayed, and then a decorative symbol indicating a big hit is stopped (FIG. 197 (G)). On the other hand, when the long battle B 'reach of the off-line pattern is selected, the screen transitions to FIG. 198 (I) after FIG. 197 (C), and an effect screen showing the off-game result is displayed as in FIG. Will be.

  As described above, even when the effect screen as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 is displayed, a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period, similarly to the case of the effect screen example shown in FIGS. An alternative effect of the first effect pattern can be realized.

  In addition, in FIG. 196 (H)-(I) and FIG. 198 (I)-(J), although the battle A production | presentation came out, it is because it is not a big hit and the game result of a slip is shown. This lost game may be used as a record of a battle history. At this time, as shown in FIG. 196 (H) and FIG. 198 (I), the display content of the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the battle history of “A” is changed. The stage turns red (shaded in the figure). In this way, when a big win is not obtained despite the appearance of a specific effect (Battle A effect) as an alternative effect, a record of the battle is recorded, so that the player can receive the current game result. Without feeling useless of being out of date, it is possible to have a higher expectation for a big jackpot when a specific performance appears again in subsequent games.

  As described above, in the alternative effect by the first effect pattern, a specific effect related to the record of the battle history appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect. Will be described again in time series. FIG. 199 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the first effect pattern. FIG. 199 (A) shows an alternative production (long battle B ′ reach) based on the first production pattern when FIG. 195 (A) to (F) or FIG. 197 (A) to (G) FIG. 199 (B) is a time chart when a big hit is shown in the flow, and FIG. 196 (G) or FIG. It is a time chart when shifting to 198 (I).

  In FIG. 199 (A), first, 8 seconds elapses in the “pre-reach state” from when the decorative symbol variation display is started until the reach state is formed (for example, FIGS. 195 (A) to (B)). Then, when the reach state is formed, a battle A effect appears for 22 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (C)). After that, when the character A wins in the battle A (for example, FIG. 195 (D)), the decorative pattern of the same pattern is displayed in a rocking state for 30 seconds (for example, FIG. 195 (E)), and then the big hit Is displayed (for example, FIG. 195 (F)). In addition, instead of displaying the decorative design of the same design in a swinging state, episode A may be displayed for 30 seconds (for example, FIGS. 197 (E) to (F)).

  In FIG. 199 (A), the entire display period of the substitute effect is 60 seconds, and the change time of the special symbol change pattern in which the SP3 type winning effect (including the long battle B 'reach) can be selected. It corresponds. And it turns out that the battle A effect which is a specific effect has appeared until 30 seconds of the first half of the display period of an alternative effect pass. The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (A) shows a case of an alternative effect (long battle B ') of the big hit pattern.

  Moreover, in FIG. 199 (B), after the display of the decorative symbol change display until the reach state is formed (pre-reach state), the battle A effect is displayed for 22 seconds in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect. The battle A effect is continuously displayed in the second half of the display period of the alternative effect as the “extended effect of battle A” without being settled (for example, FIG. 196 (G)). . After that, the battle conclusion is displayed, and whether or not the game result of this game is a big hit is shown to the player. The time chart shown in FIG. 199 (B) shows the case of a substitute effect (long battle B ′) of the off-line pattern, or the case of a winning effect (long battle A) of the same type (SP3 type) different from the substitute effect. Yes.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199, in the alternative production by the first production pattern, the specific production appears in the first half of the display period of the substitution production based on the recorded (and taught) battle history. Therefore, the player can increase the sense of expectation for the big hit (especially the high hit) by recognizing that the specific effect has appeared from the early stage of the alternative effect. And even if the expectation (that is, the reliability in Battle A reach) for the specific effect is relatively low, the specific effect (for example, Battle A effect) appears as an alternative effect based on the record of the battle history. When it is done, it is considered to be a highly reliable performance, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit), and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In the description with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199 described above, when a long battle B ′ reach is executed as an alternative effect when a battle history with the battle A effect as a specific effect is recorded, Since the battle A effect appears immediately, the battle A effect appears even though the winning effect of the B system (non-A system) unrelated to the character A is selected internally. That is not recognized by the player. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as another example, the battle A effect appears after the player is made aware that the non-A system winning effect has been selected when the alternative effect is executed. You may make it do. Specifically, for example, a screen (character selection screen) on which a character to be confronted is selected after the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. To. In the character selection screen, the initial state is the state where the character B is selected, the character A is selected at the time of determination, and the battle A effect by the character A appears in the subsequent confrontation effect. do it.

  By doing in this way, the player can recognize that it is a winning effect related to the character B, and the battle A effect that is a specific effect can appear in the first half of the alternative effect. In such a case, the player's expectation can be enhanced by clearly indicating the change of the selected character from B to A. More specifically, for example, even if the expectation to the big hit regarding the winning effect related to the character B is not relatively high, by changing to a specific effect (battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history, Expectation for big hits (especially high hits) can be drastically increased. Also, in the initial state of the character selection screen, a non-A system winning effect (in this case, for example, a battle B system reach) is expected, so that the player has an expectation for the big hit by the winning effect, By selecting the character A corresponding to the record of the battle history, it is possible to make the player have a higher expectation for the big hit (particularly the high hit). In this way, the interest of the player can be increased step by step.

[6-5-2. Alternative production second production pattern]
Next, as the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a specific effect is made to appear within the display period of the alternative effect, and a related effect related to the specific effect is displayed between the specific effects to be displayed. The alternative production to appear will be described. In addition, when a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the second effect pattern and the third and fourth effect patterns described later, FIG. 195 to FIG. Although the confrontation effect with the enemy character by the character A is displayed as in 198, details thereof are omitted because they overlap.

  FIG. 200 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the second effect pattern. FIG. 200A is a time chart of a first example of an alternative effect based on the second effect pattern, and FIG. 200B is a time chart of a second example of an alternative effect based on the second effect pattern. In the first example and the second example, the timing at which the related effect is displayed is different, but a specific effect (battle A effect) appears within the display period of the alternative effect (long battle B 'reach), And it does not change about a related production | presentation appearing between the said specific production | presentations. In the second effect pattern, a specific effect (battle A effect) that is continuously displayed in the case of other effect patterns, such as battle A1 to battle A4 shown in FIG. Appears separately.

  First, in the 1st example of the alternative production | presentation by the 2nd production | presentation pattern shown in FIG. Related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) related to the effects appear multiple times.

  Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of the confrontation effect between the character A who is a friend and the character Z which is an enemy is displayed. After 6 seconds when the image related to the battle A1 is displayed, the first related effect is displayed (cut-in 1). In the cut-in 1, for example, it is displayed whether or not the character A performs a punch attack on the character Z and the attack is correct. Whether or not the attack is hit may be determined by performing an internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery in this game (whether it is a big hit). When the attack is successful, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g (see, for example, FIG. 195C) is reduced to give the player an impression of approaching victory.

  When the display period of cut-in 1 (8 seconds) elapses, the continuation of the battle A effect is again displayed for 4 seconds (battle A2). Thereafter, the second related effect is displayed for 8 seconds (cut-in 2). In the cut-in 2, for example, as in the punch attack in the cut-in 1, the character A performs a kick attack on the character Z, and whether or not the attack is correct is displayed. When the attack is hit, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g is further reduced, giving the player the impression that it is closer to victory.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the continuation of the battle A effect again (battle A3), and after the elapse of 4 seconds, the third related effect is displayed for 14 seconds (cut-in 3). In the cut-in 3, for example, a mysterious attack is displayed as a stronger attack than the attacks in the cut-in 1 and the cut-in 2, and when the special lottery result in this game is a big hit, the mysterious attack is targeted to the enemy character. A display is displayed. Then, if the mysterious attack hits, the battle A effect (battle A4) that is displayed subsequently reduces the enemy character's physical strength shown in the gauge area 1900g to 0, indicating the victory of the character A, Let the player recognize that the game result of the game is a big hit. If the mysterious attack was not successful (failed), it indicates the defeat of character A in battle A4 and allows the player to recognize that the game result of this game is out of play. In addition, the effect time of battle A4 shown to FIG. 200 (A) is 8 seconds used as the longest among the divided battle A effects (battle A1-battle A4).

  According to the production of the first example as described above, the related production appears several times in the interval when the battle A, which is the specific production, appears, thereby increasing the expectation for the result of the battle A. It can be increased or decreased for each related effect, and the player's sense of expectation can be varied in various ways. Specifically, the greater the number of successful punch attacks and kick attacks described above, the greater the chance of a big hit, or even if neither the punch attack nor the kick attack succeeds, as long as the last mystery attack is right. You can expect a reverse victory.

  Further, the content of the related effects in the first example is not limited to the attack of the character A as described above, and may be various effects having a meaning of exciting a specific effect. For example, the attack of the enemy character Z may be displayed to determine whether or not the attack can be avoided, or the degree of expectation may be changed according to an attack pattern (type of technique) that appears between characters. Furthermore, the display color may be changed to change the degree of expectation. This is performed not only in related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) but also in specific effects (battle A1 to battle A4). Good.

  Next, in the second example of the alternative effect based on the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200 (B), there is a battle between the battle A effects (battle A1 and battle A4) that appear within the display period of the alternative effect. Related effects (cut-in) related to the A effects appear continuously.

  Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of the confrontation effect between the character A who is a friend and the character Z which is an enemy is displayed. When 10 seconds when an image related to the battle A1 is displayed, the related effects of the battle A are displayed (cut-in). In the cut-in, for example, a conversation between the character A and the character Z is displayed, and then a display as if the character A is powered up is performed. The effect result by cut-in may be determined by internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery. Depending on the content and display color of the conversation between the character A and the character Z, the expectation to the big hit is changed, and if the character A succeeds in power-up, the attack power of the character A is increased. And give the player an impression that it is closer to victory.

  Then, after the cut-in effect is displayed for 30 seconds, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed for 12 seconds, and it is determined whether or not the character A wins (battle A4). When the big hit pattern long battle B 'reach is selected, the battle A4 shows the victory of the character A and makes the player recognize that the game result of this game is a big hit. When the long battle B 'reach of the off-line pattern is selected, the battle A4 indicates the defeat of the character A, and the player recognizes that the game result of this game is off.

  According to the production of the second example as described above, a long-time related production (cut-in) of 30 seconds appears between the time when the battle A as a specific production appears, Over a longer period of time (30 seconds for the entire Battle A reach including the Battle A production) (52 seconds for Battle A1, A4, and cut-in in total in Fig. 200B) A production having relevance will appear. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention and expectation with respect to a specific performance, and to increase the expectation of big hit (especially high hit).

  As described in the first example and the second example above, the final determination result (whether it is a big hit or not) in the battle A4 is shown in the battle A4. Is one of the most important production periods in the progress of alternative production. Therefore, in the 2nd pattern of alternative production, among battle A production (battle A1-battle A4) which appears in multiple times, the production time of battle A production (namely, battle A4) which appears last Is preferably set to the longest. For example, in FIG. 200 (A) of the first example, the battle A4 effect time is 8 seconds, which is longer than the maximum effect time of 6 seconds due to other battle A effects (battles A1 to A3). For example, in FIG. 200B of the second example, the battle A4 performance time is 12 seconds, which is longer than the 10-second performance time of the other battle A performance (battle A1).

  In this way, in the second effect pattern of the substitute effect, the determination result in the substitute effect is displayed among the specific effects (battle A effect) that are displayed in a plurality of times within the display period of the substitute effect. When setting the production time of the production (battle A4) to be longer than the production times of the other specific productions (battle A1 to battle A3) that are divided, "determination result (for example, whether or not it is a big hit)" Since the display period can be ensured for a long time, it is possible to expect an effect of sufficiently attracting the player's interest and enhancing the interest.

  Further, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, the display pattern of the related effect appearing between the specific effects appearing is selected from a plurality of types (for example, the first example and the second example). In addition, the expectation for the big hit can be made different for each display pattern. In such a case, since it is possible to make a difference in the degree of improvement of the player's expectation, it can be expected that the gameability is improved. In addition, as described above, even if the specific performance is a relatively low-reliability performance in the initial setting, the reliability is enhanced when the performance is displayed in the alternative production. The effect that the fall of can be suppressed is produced.

  In addition, with reference to FIGS. 200 (A) and 200 (B), an example of an effect in the case where the long battle B 'reach is selected as an alternative effect when a battle history record related to the battle A effect is being performed has been described. However, the SP3 type of other short-lived effects (specifically, Long Battle A reach) that has the same variation time as the long-acting B 'reach of the alternative effect is similar to the content of the effect excluding the related effects of the alternative effect You may make it do. In such a case, when comparing the long A battle reach and the alternative effect (long battle B 'reach), the point that the variation time is 60 seconds and the effect screen of the battle format by the character A is displayed. A common difference is whether or not a cut-in as a related effect occurs. Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194, the alternative effect has a higher degree of expectation for big hit (or high hit). Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the long battle A reach or the long battle B 'reach (alternative effect) until the cut-in (related effect) occurs. Since high long battle B 'reach can be estimated, it can be expected by the progress of production.

  In addition, the effect of Long Battle A Reach can be made to display an effect screen similar to the related effect in Long Battle B 'Reach, which is more similar to Long Battle B' Reach than the Long Battle A Reach described in the previous section. May be. In such a case, the discrimination between the long battle A reach and the long battle B 'reach becomes more difficult, and the player can enjoy the display result until the production is completed.

  Further, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a short battle of 30 seconds including a specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 200A and 200B, the state before reach for 8 seconds and the battle A effect of 22 seconds in total. Plug-in control for inserting an intermission effect (e.g., equivalent to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 200A and 200B) when the performance appearance control is performed to make the appearance appear. When this plug-in control is performed, interruption control for interrupting the appearance appearance control may be performed. The interruption control is interrupted when a predetermined time elapses (for example, 8 seconds corresponding to cut-in 1 in the case of the interruption control after the battle A1 in FIG. 200A), and the timing of the interruption. By performing the control so that the appearance appearance control is resumed (the effect screen corresponding to the battle A2 is displayed), the alternative effect can appear.

  In addition to this, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, an effect pattern may be provided on the peripheral control board 4010 side as effect data that can display the alternative effect itself. Thus, by providing an effect pattern as an alternative effect from the beginning, it is possible to make an alternative effect appear even when any of the first to fourth effect patterns is selected.

[6-5-3. Alternative production third production pattern]
Next, as a third effect pattern of an alternative effect, an alternative effect that suggests that a specific effect is started within the display period of the alternative effect and that causes the suggested specific effect to appear will be described.

  FIG. 201 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the third effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 201, a change in the effect screen with the passage of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B 'reach) is selected when a battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 201, first, there is a period (pre-reach state) from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state in the initial 8 seconds of the display period of the substitute effect. Thereafter, the suggestion effect appears for 30 seconds (suggestion effect A). This suggestion effect A is an effect with a content that suggests that the display of the “specific effect (battle A effect)” in which the battle history is recorded, and the degree of expectation that the specific effect will be started. It may be made to appear by selecting from a plurality of types of suggestion effects with a difference. In addition, the suggestive effect A may appear between the pre-reach states.

  A specific example of the suggestion effect A is shown below. For example, a notice effect display such as “something happens” is displayed at the beginning of the suggestion effect, a notice that the “match effect” will be performed in the middle, and the character A is scheduled to appear in the end of the character A This suggests that a battle effect (that is, a battle A effect) is started.

  In addition, for example, an enemy character appears at the beginning of the suggestion effect A, the critical situation of the ally by the enemy character is displayed in the middle, and the character A is asked for help at the end, so that the character after the suggestion effect A This suggests that a battle with an enemy character by A (that is, a battle A effect) is started.

  In addition, for example, in the early stage of the suggestion effect A, a screen on which the battle B effect by the character B is likely to start is displayed, and in the middle game, the character A appears before the battle B effect starts and substitutes for the character B. A screen is displayed in which a conversation is performed and the character B is changed to the character A at the end, suggesting that a battle effect (that is, a battle A effect) by the character A is started after the suggestion effect A.

  Then, after such a suggestive effect (suggest effect A) appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect whose start is suggested by the suggestive effect appears for 22 seconds. (Battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A battles with the enemy character is displayed, and if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the victory of the character A is finally shown, and the game result of the game is a big hit Is recognized by the player. Further, if the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (missing), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made aware that the gaming result of the game is lost.

  It should be emphasized that in the alternative effect by such a third effect pattern, a specific effect (battle A effect) corresponding to the record of the battle history has appeared in the latter half of the battle A effect. It is preferred to teach. Further, at the stage of the suggestion effect, an expected effect such as blinking of the teaching area 1900a related to the battle A is performed so as to indicate that there is a possibility that the specific effect may be started without performing such emphasis teaching. You may make it perform. In this way, the player is clearly informed of the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of a specific performance, so that the player can surely produce a performance with a high expectation of a big hit (especially a high hit). It is possible to visually recognize that it has been issued.

  When the substitute effect by the third effect pattern as described above is performed, the specific effect (battle A effect) is actually generated at the time when the suggestive effect appears, even before the battle A effect is started. ) Can be created to increase the player's expectation for appearing. When the battle A effect appears, the expectation for the big hit (especially the high hit) is high, and therefore it takes a long time (52 seconds in the example of FIG. 201) from the suggestion effect A to the end of the battle A effect. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation and interest.

  In addition, when a suggestion effect appears, it may be ensured or “start of a specific effect” is confirmed with a relatively high probability. In such a case, the player displays the suggestion effect. In the early stage of alternative production, you can be confident that a specific production with high reliability will appear, so you can expect a favorable game development (big hit or high hit) with a sense of security. .

  In addition, a so-called “false suggestion effect” may be included so that the “start of a specific effect” is not necessarily confirmed even if the suggestion effect appears, and in such a case, To raise the sense of expectation for the appearance of a specific performance with high reliability than usual, and to enjoy the game development with a thrilling feeling until the specific performance actually appears it can.

  Further, the suggestive effect in the third effect pattern of the alternative effect is not necessarily limited to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and may be an aspect that can suggest that a specific effect is started in the latter half of the alternative effect. For example, other effect methods such as an effect effect of an accessory or a lighting effect of an LED lamp may be employed, and these effect methods may be combined.

[6-5-4. Alternative production fourth production pattern]
Next, as the fourth production pattern of the alternative production, a “different production” that makes it difficult to recall the specific production in the first half of the display period of the alternative production (which is less relevant to the specific production) appears, and the alternative production. An alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the latter half of the display period will be described.

  FIG. 202 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 202, the change of the effect screen with the passage of time when an alternative effect (for example, long battle B 'reach) is selected when a battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect. It is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 202, first, there is a period (pre-reach state) from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the formation of the reach state in the initial 8 seconds of the alternative effect display period. Thereafter, “different production” appears over 30 seconds (for example, battle B as different production A). As described above, the “different effect” is an effect that makes it difficult to recall a specific effect (in this case, a battle A effect), and may be an effect that is less relevant to the specific effect. Here, as the different effect A in the long battle B 'reach, a battle B effect in which the character B battles with the enemy character appears, but an effect in which other characters battle (for example, a battle C effect) An effect other than the battle format, such as a character or a story unrelated to the character A (for example, the story B described in FIG. 186) may be used.

  In addition, in different productions, it may or may not be attached as an effect content (for example, character B loses or wins), but in any case, the variation of all decorative symbols will not stop, The decorative symbols change until the battle A effect that appears in the latter half of the performance ends.

  Then, after a different effect A appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect appears (battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A battles with the enemy character is displayed, and if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the victory of the character A is finally shown, and the game result of the game is a big hit Is recognized by the player. Further, if the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (missing), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made aware that the gaming result of the game is lost.

  It should be emphasized that in the alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern, a specific effect (battle A effect) corresponding to the record of the battle history appears in the latter half of the battle A effect. It is preferred to teach. In this way, the player is clearly informed of the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of a specific performance, so that the player has appeared in the latter half of the alternative performance, It is possible to visually recognize that the degree of expectation for big hit (especially high hit) is high.

  Here, a connection between different effects and a specific effect thereafter will be described in detail with a specific example. For example, when the battle B effect appears as the different effect A, an effect in which the character B who is an ally character battles against the character Z which is an enemy character is displayed. Then, as an example of the different performance A, a screen in which the character B is defeated by the character Z in the battle B performance is displayed, so that the player feels that the game is out of play. Thereafter, after a certain period of time has elapsed, the character A appears, and a screen is displayed in which the character A challenges the character Z to rematch. According to such an alternative effect, after a different effect A is performed in the first half of the alternative effect, a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the second half of the alternative effect, so that the character B is once defeated. After that, a snowball battle by the character A is started, and when the character A wins by the battle A production, a big win is shown to the player. Therefore, after making the player aware of the loss of the game once, Expectations can be revived and interest can be expected to increase rapidly.

  Further, as another example of the different effects, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the different effects A are used as a part of the effect of changing the decorative symbols arranged in the image display area 1900d according to the degree of advantage of the big win. It may be. That is, a screen in which the character B wins the character Z in the first half of the different effect A (battle B effect) is displayed, and at this time, the arrangement of the decorative symbols indicating the big hit (low hit) with a relatively low degree of advantage is temporarily displayed. Display (when rocking). Thereafter, the character A is suddenly made to appear at the end of the different performance A so that the jackpot promotion effect is started, and a specific effect (battle A effect) appears as the promotion effect. Then, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, the character A wins in the battle A effect, and the arrangement pattern of the decorative symbols is changed for high hits. . In addition, when the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, a display is made so that the character A cannot win (for example, a draw) in the battle A effect, and the arrangement of the decorative symbols is changed. Do not do that. According to such an alternative effect, after giving the player the joy that the big hit is shown by the different effects, the specific effect as the promotion effect appears suddenly, so that the big hit has a relatively low degree of advantage An opportunity to dispel the player's instinct for being a big hit (low hit) is given, and when converted to a big hit with a high degree of advantage, the player can be given great joy. Effect of giving a multi-level satisfaction to the person.

  As described above, in the alternative effect by the fourth effect pattern, the player can be surprised and expected by having the specific effect appear after the appearance of the different effect that is difficult to recall the specific effect. It is possible to expect the effect of enhancing the interest of the player with respect to various effects that can appear on the pachinko machine 1.

  More specifically, when the substitute effect is performed according to the fourth effect pattern, a different effect that is not related to the specific effect is performed in the first half of the substitute effect, and at this stage, the player is conscious of the specific effect. Without having to, you can enjoy game development with different performances. Then, when a specific performance appears suddenly after that, it is possible to provide a game with surprise, and the expectation for a big hit (especially high hit) by the appearance of the specific performance. Can increase interest.

  Further, as described above, in the alternative effect based on the fourth effect pattern, if the variation time for displaying the specific effect can be secured, the specific effect appears after the different effect appears. The timing can be arbitrarily changed. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such an alternative effect can be executed, it is not known from the player's viewpoint at which timing a specific effect (battle A effect) appears. For example, when the SP2 type battle B reach or the SP3 type long battle B reach is selected, the battle effect by the character B is started, but the battle effect is not displayed after that. finish. However, when the long battle B 'reach is selected, even if the character B cannot win by the battle B effect, the battle A effect by the character A appears, so that the expectation for the big hit is once again achieved. Since it can be held, the player can enjoy the development of the production while always having a sense of expectation for the specific production that may occur.

  As described above, in the alternative effect of the fourth effect pattern, the different effect may be an effect that is less relevant to the specific effect, but as a further relationship, You may make it consciously form the relationship which has a difference in the reliability of each jackpot about the winning effect recalled from a different effect.

  For example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect and a different effect is a battle B effect, referring to each of the distribution tables (1A, 1B) described above, a win recalled from the battle A effect that is the specific effect The effect (for example, SP2 type) is Battle A reach, and the winning effect (for example, SP2 type) recalled from the battle B effect of the different effect A is Battle B reach. Comparing the reliability of the big hits in the initial stage (war history P) for each winning effect, the battle B reach is more reliable than the battle A reach (see FIGS. 187 and 189). When the B effect is viewed as a single effect, the expectation for the big hit (or high hit) is higher in the case where the battle B effect appears than in the case where the battle A effect appears. In addition, even when compared with the SP3 type winning effect, the long battle B reach recalled from the battle B effect is more reliable than the long battle A reach recalled from the battle A effect ([6-4 -1] and “6-4-2”), the expectation to the big hit is higher in the battle B effect than in the battle A effect. As described above, in the alternative production of the fourth production pattern in which the different production A (battle B production) is performed in a combination with higher reliability than the specific production (battle A production), the first half has different reliability. The appearance of the production A can increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit. And if it becomes a deployment that can not reach a big hit in different production A (defeat in battle B production), the player will be discouraged once, but after that a specific production (battle A production) appears, Again, the player can be expected to win big hits. In other words, even if the big win is not shown in the high-reliability production that appeared in the first half of the alternative production, it can be expected to win again by the subsequent development (the specific production appears), A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect is a battle A effect, an effect having a lower reliability than the battle A effect may be used as a different effect A to perform an alternative effect using the fourth effect pattern. Strictly speaking, the “effect having a lower reliability than the battle A effect” is an effect that can recall a winning effect having a lower reliability than the winning effect recalled by the battle A effect. At this time, even if a low-reliability different performance appears in the first half of the alternative production, the player may not have a high expectation for the big hit. When a specific effect (Battle A effect) appears, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be rapidly increased. In other words, even if a relatively low-reliability production appears in the first half of the alternative production, if a specific production (Battle A production) appears thereafter, the production will be highly reliable. Even if the production is presented, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for big hits and high hits, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when a specific performance based on the record of the battle history appears after a different performance, the expectation for the big hit (especially the high hit) has been raised, so that a specific performance suddenly appears In addition to the enjoyment in production, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances the expectation in terms of profit (acquisition of benefits).

  Further, as described above in the specific example of the different effects, when the battle A effect by the character A appears after the character B has been defeated in the battle B effect, the game becomes a revival pattern effect. Since it is possible to make the player feel that the winning effect is performed a plurality of times (there are a plurality of winning opportunities), it can be expected to enhance the interest of the player. Furthermore, if the different effects that lead to such a resurgence pattern are made to appear multiple times during the first half of a single alternative effect, it is possible to achieve a continuous effect that further increases the chance of winning. Can enhance the interest of

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history (battle A effect) is performed by performing an alternative effect using the first to fourth effect patterns. Even when a display time longer than the display time (the battle A effect is 22 seconds. The battle A reach as a whole is 30 seconds) is selected (here, an alternative effect of 60 seconds), it can be displayed. In general, the longer the display time, the higher the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit or high hit, so a specific effect will appear in a longer display time than the original display time. As a result, it is possible to expect an effect that makes the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game.

  In addition, as described above in [6-4-1] to [6-4-2], the ratio at which the substitute effect is executed when the big hit (or the high hit) is made when the battle history is being recorded is , Higher than when no history of war is recorded. Therefore, when the specific performance is displayed when the history of the battle concerning the specific performance (Battle A effect) is being taught and taught, the player increases the degree of expectation for the big hit (or high hit). However, such a specific effect can appear as an alternative effect even if it is a winning effect with a different variation time from the original variation time corresponding to the Battle A effect (30 seconds Battle A reach). Therefore, it can be expected that a specific effect appears regardless of the variation time of the special variation pattern, and the player's expectation for a plurality of types of winning effects can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability related to a specific performance (reliability in a winning effect where a specific performance appears) is improved by the transition of the battle history. Even if it is a low-reliability production with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, after a battle history is recorded, it can be expected to have a high degree of expectation for a specific production. As a result, there is an effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to the appearance of the low reliability effect as seen in the conventional gaming machine.

[6-6. Supplement on determination of production pattern]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when using the sorting table as described above in [6-1] to [6-4], it is not always necessary to change the sorting in the low hit pattern. . However, when changing the allocation in the low hit pattern, the change is made so as not to exceed the amount of increase in the allocation in the high hit pattern. Specifically, in the case of the allocation tables 1A and 1B, the allocation table 1A and 1B are changed so as not to exceed the increase amount of the allocation of a specific winning effect (battle A reach) in the high hit pattern. By doing so, even if the allocation to the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the allocation amount in the high hit pattern, a specific winning effect appears in the game after the record of the battle history has been recorded. When it is done, the expectation to the high hit can be raised. Further, in the case of the distribution tables 2A and 2B, the change is made so as not to exceed the amount of increase in the allocation of the high hit pattern in the winning effect (long battle B 'reach, long battle C' reach) in which the distribution is increased. It shall be. In this way, even if the allocation to the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the allocation amount in the high hit pattern, a specific winning effect (battle A reach) in the game after the record of the battle history is performed. A variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which long battle B can be selected in a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause the occurrence of the event (for example, a variation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a variation time of 30 seconds). Even if it has been done, the long battle B 'reach can appear, so that the specific effect (battle A reach) can appear, and the degree of expectation for high hits can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “battle A reach (strictly the battle A effect)” that can be selected when the variation time is 30 seconds has been described as the specific effect (specific win effect). It may be a specific performance. Further, the target of the specific effect is not limited to one reach effect, and a plurality of reach effects that have relevance may be the target of the specific effect. Specifically, for example, by setting the reach effect relating to the character A as a specific effect, not only the battle A reach that can be selected when the variation pattern has a variation time of 30 seconds, but also the variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. The long battle A reach that can be selected can also be included in the “specific effects” of the same category. If the history of the battle is recorded for such a “specific effect”, not only when the battle A reach appears in an outlier manner, but also when the long battle A reach appears in an outlier manner. Also, the battle history is recorded. As a result, since the results of the battle history that “the reach related to the character A has appeared in an out-of-phase manner” are recorded together, a big hit is not obtained even though a plurality of types of winning effects related to the character A have appeared. In such a case, the character A can be powered up, and the degree of expectation for the big hit (and high hit) when such a winning effect appears next time can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation big hit is “high hit” with a high degree of advantage, and the normal big hit is “low hit” with a low degree of advantage. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, “high hit” The classification of “low hit” is not particularly limited. For example, the high hit and the low hit may be distinguished based on other conditions related to the gaming state after the winning game (whether or not the short-time game is given, the number of short-time games to be given, etc.). When such a division is made with respect to “high hit” and “low hit”, it is advantageous based on the expected value (for example, appearance) that a player can obtain through a series of advantageous states controlled based on the big hit. It can be understood that the degree is divided.

  Further, as another example of the division between “high hit” and “low hit”, the division may be made based on the difference in opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit game. Specifically, for example, it can be classified based on the number of rounds in the big hit game (whether the big hit is 16R big hit or less than 16R). Also, for example, the big winning opening 2103 opening time in each round during the big hit can be classified into a big hit and a relatively short big hit. Further, for example, it is possible to classify based on the difference in the number of rounds (substantial number of rounds) in which the release control that allows easy entry of game media during a big hit is performed. When performing such divisions for “high hits” and “low hits”, the level of advantage is divided based on the number of game balls that can be obtained by a player by big hits (expected value of winning balls). Can be seen as.

  Then, “high hit” and “low hit” may be classified by combining the classification criteria as described above. For example, if it is a criterion for classifying “being a promising big hit” and “being a substantial expected amount of winning by the big hit exceeds a predetermined amount” as “high hit”, so-called “ It is also possible to exclude a big hit that cannot be expected to obtain a substantial appearance, such as “per-latency”, from the high hit. That is, taking the jackpot type shown in FIG. 173 (C) as an example, only “specific 2 4R probability variation big hit”, “specific 4 8R probability variation big hit”, and “specific 5 16R probability variation big hit” are only “high hits”. It is also possible to classify “specific 1 4R latent probability variation big hit” and “specific 3 16R sudden probability variation big hit” into “low hit” together with “non-specific 4R normal big hit”. In such a case, if a “specific performance” appears when a battle history is being recorded, the expectation of a big hit for “high hit” can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation with respect to the jackpot having the highest advantage that the player can be obtained, so that it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Moreover, the classification based on the difference in the degree of advantage need not be two types of high and low, and three or more types may be performed. Further, “high hit” and “low hit” may be determined according to the hit type. By doing so, an effect can be expected for shortening the development period and shortening the development cost. Specifically, for example, in a certain model, types A and B, which are hits with low advantage, are classified as “low hits”, and type C, which is a hit with high advantages, is classified as “high hits”. . Here, when developing another model, when it is desired to change type A to a hit with a high degree of advantage, it is only necessary to change type A to the “high hit” category according to the change, so it is easy. It can be changed. In other words, if “high hit” and “low hit” are determined according to the hit type, it is not necessary to change the setting for each hit included in each type, and it is expected to reduce the development burden. it can.

  Further, it is preferable that such “high hit” and “low hit” sections are set on the peripheral control board 4010 (may be other than the main control board 4100). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the distribution of the production pattern including the winning production can be changed in a different manner between “high hit” and “low hit”. Since it is controlled by the board 4010 (particularly the peripheral control MPU 4140a), when the “high hits” and “low hits” are set in the same peripheral control board 4010, the processing load on the main control board 4100 side is reduced. In addition, the amount of communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010 can be reduced, and further, the processing efficiency in the peripheral control board 4010 can be expected to be improved.

  As described above, “high hit” and “low hit” are provisional names used for ease of explanation, and it is not necessary to use such terms for internal design. May be managed so that a classification corresponding to “high hit” or “low hit” can be made. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, characteristics that differ depending on the gaming machine are obtained by consciously classifying the degree of advantage based on various criteria and performing characteristic allocation setting of the winning effect. It is possible to realize a change in the degree of expectation for the appearance of a specific winning effect while reflecting the specifications.

[7. Game method during short-time control]
In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined level or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The guide ball member 2142 flows down and is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 to be discharged downward from directly above the gate portion 2105, so that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability. Yes. In other words, the game ball can easily enter the gate portion 2105 by performing a so-called right hit.

  Also, in this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the normal symbol lottery process is executed in a very short time. Is “per hit”, the movable piece 2106 moves backward to accept the game ball to the second start port 2102 so that the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 wins the second start port 2102 It has become. In addition, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is “out of normal”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the big winning opening 2103. Therefore, a game that directly targets the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be performed by making a right strike.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed), the game ball is guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 or the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of planted obstacle nails, A game ball can be awarded to the general winning port 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning port 2104, and the like. Further, when a game ball enters the warp inlet 2504 that is guided to the warp inlet 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, and the stage The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement due to the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be awarded with a high probability.

  Further, in this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol Is shortened to an extremely short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second starting port 2102 is controlled with an opening / closing pattern that is closed and opened for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is extremely high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 21 It is much easier to win a game ball to the second start port 2102 due to the long time of the time, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2102 than the first start port 2101. You can win a prize. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2102 is aimed. In addition, a game ball cannot be won at the second start port 2102.

  As described above, during control in the non-time-short state, even if the second start port 2102 is aimed, the second start port 2102 cannot win a game ball. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center bonus 2500. Further, in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and flow down. For this reason, even if a game ball is shot on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2101, it does not necessarily win the first starting port 2101, but wins the first starting port 2101. The game balls that did not exist are discharged to the outside through an out port 1151 provided at the lower center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, during control in the short-time state, a game ball can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2102 than at the first start port 2101. In order to win, the game ball must be launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2500. Also, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2102 is opened, if a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, it passes through the gate portion 2301. The game balls thus won are awarded to the second starting port 2102 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control in the short-time state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the control in the non-short-time state is being performed. Compared with the first starting port 2101 in the above, the game ball wins the second starting port 2102 very efficiently.

  In addition, during the time-short state control, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit when passing through the gate portion 2301 is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for the control is constant and short, the open time of the second start port 21 is long, etc., so that a game ball can easily win the second start port 2102, and further, the game can be played to the second start port 2102. When the ball is won, the time required for the display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. It is possible to digest the symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control). That is, when the short hit state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2102 so that the big hit is achieved again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired by controlling to the big hit game state. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second start port 2102 is one, and therefore, the number of game balls to the second start port 2102 is Even if winnings occur frequently, the burden on the game hall can be reduced while enhancing the interest of the player.

[8. Continuous defeat production using guided decoration member (object detection sensor)]
In the present embodiment, a combined effect using an image effect by an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) in the front unit 2000. As described above, when the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 detect the player's operation on the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, a continuous destruction effect that can defeat the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is achieved. Running. As will be described in detail later, this continuous defeat effect will be described in detail later. As an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, after starting the variable display of decorative symbols, 3 corresponding to each of the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213. A human enemy character appears and an instruction is given as to which order to defeat the three enemy characters (in which order the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144 and 2213 should be operated). In addition, after the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are operated in the designated order (detected in the order in which the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are designated), the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is used. The player is instructed to operate once. When the enemy character is defeated by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the quasi-continuous variation is continued (all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a display pattern that does not become a reach mode in the decorative symbol variation display). After that, control to start the display of the decorative symbols again) is performed, and when the enemy character remains, the reach appearance is developed without continuing the pseudo continuous variation by forming the reach mode. doing.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle guidance decorative member 2117 are both provided in the first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the middle guidance decoration member 2117 is middle. It is arranged adjacent to the lower side of the object detection sensor 2116. Further, the middle object detection sensor 2116 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 from the player through the transparent glass unit 590. It is possible to detect whether the hand has touched the medium guiding decorative member 2117.

  Further, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the first starting port 2101, and the lower peripheral portion (out port 1115) on the lower side of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. (Positions close to the inner periphery of the game area 1100). Further, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is disposed at the approximate center in the lateral direction of the game area 1100 and is disposed below the right guiding decorative member 2144 and the left guiding decorative member 2213 so that the player is seated. In order to touch the right guide decorative member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand in this state, it is not necessary to lift the arm more than the right guide decorative member 2144 and the left guide decorative member 2213, and three guide decorative members 2117. , 2144, 2213 are easy to operate. The middle guide decoration member 2117 is faced down to the front and in a circle corresponding to the fact that the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are positioned relatively downward as viewed from the player. Decorated with arrows.

  110, both the right object detection sensor 2143 and the right guiding decorative member 2144 are provided on the fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the right guiding decorative member 2144. Is arranged adjacent to the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. The right object detection sensor 2143 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 from the player through the transparent glass unit 590. It is possible to detect whether the hand has touched the right guiding decorative member 2144.

  Further, the right guiding decorative member 2144 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the peripheral portion on the right side of the gaming area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player (the inner circumference of the gaming area 1100). It is arranged at a position close to The right guiding decorative member 2144 is arranged on the right side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100, and touches the right guiding decorative member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand while the player is seated. Since the distance from the left hand is farther than the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the left guiding decorative member 2213, the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are difficult to operate. The right guide decoration member 2144 is positioned on the right side in a circle on the front surface in correspondence with the right guide decoration member 2144 being positioned on the right side as viewed from the player among the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. Decorated with arrows.

  110, both the left object detection sensor 2212 and the left guide decoration member 2213 are provided in the front side unit 2200 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the left guide decoration member 2213 detects the left object. The sensor 2212 is disposed adjacent to the left side. Further, the left object detection sensor 2212 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player passes through a transparent glass unit 590 that allows the player to view the inside of the game area 1100. It is possible to detect whether the hand has touched the left guide decorative member 2213.

  The left guide decorative member 2213 is arranged on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is slightly lower on the left side of the gaming area 1100 that can be viewed by the player (on the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100). It is arranged at a close position). Further, the left guide decoration member 2213 is disposed on the left side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100 and is disposed at the same height as the right guide decoration member 2144. However, the handle device 500 is held in a state where the player is seated. In order to touch the left guide decorative member 2213 with the left hand while rotating with the right hand, the distance from the left hand is closer than the right guide decorative member 2144, and therefore the operation is performed among the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213. It is easy. In addition, since the left guide decoration member 2213 is visually recognized by the player among the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, and is arranged on the left side, a left-pointing arrow is formed in a circle on the front surface. The decoration is arranged.

  In this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) are all disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the object detection sensor is arranged around the liquid crystal display device (for example, in the center object) as in the prior art, when the player operates to detect the object detection sensor, It is located in front of the liquid crystal display device and hinders visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and there is a risk that the effect contents will not be fully understood. However, since the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are all disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can detect any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. Is operated, the user's hand is not positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and viewing of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not prevented. Further, even if the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, it is not necessary to lift the arm to a height higher than the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the three guide decoration members 2117, Each of 2144 and 2213 is easy to operate.

  In addition, a transparent glass unit 590 is provided in front of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can detect any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. When operating, the surface of the glass unit 590 may be touched to contaminate the surface. At this time, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is soiled, it may hinder the viewing of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. However, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 Even if the player operates to detect one of them, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, and visually recognizes the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Will not cause any trouble.

  In this example, the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) are all peripheral portions (game areas) that can be visually recognized by the player. 1100 in the vicinity of the inner periphery of 1100). That is, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) can roll a game ball in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. Even if the player operates to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, the player's hand is placed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Not only is it not positioned, but it is also not positioned in front of the rolling area, particularly whether the game ball wins in the first start port 2101 or not, and the game ball wins in the first start port 2101. There is no hindrance to seeing whether or not. Further, if the surface of the glass unit 590 in the front surface of the rolling region is soiled, it may hinder the visual recognition of whether or not the game ball wins at the first start port 2101, but the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, Even if the player operates to detect any one of 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, and the game ball wins the first start port 2101. There will be no trouble in visually recognizing whether or not.

  Further, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, and an effect using the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is executed. In this case, the player does not touch the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, but directs the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 to touch the player (for example, guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, and so on). In step 2213, an effect is produced in which only the designated guiding decorative member is illuminated and decorated. For this reason, even if the player operates to detect any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. The surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is not soiled. That is, if the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is soiled, it becomes difficult to detect the player's hand that touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, but the object detection sensor 2116 , 2143, 2212 without contaminating the surface of the glass unit 590, the player's hand touching the guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 can be reliably detected.

  Further, in this example, during the control in the non-time-short state, a game is performed in which a game ball is shot on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start port 2101, which can be visually recognized by the player. In the game area 1100, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 1616) are provided on the side of the roll area where the game ball can roll from the left side of the center accessory 2500. 2143, 2212), the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the left guiding decorative member 2213 (the middle object detecting sensor 2116 and the left object detecting sensor 2212) are arranged. On the other hand, during the short-time control, a game is performed in which a game ball is shot on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2102, but the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player is played. Among them, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) are provided on the side of the rolling area where the game ball can roll from the right side of the center accessory 2500. Among them, a right guiding decorative member 2144 (right object detection sensor 2143) is disposed. As described above, only one of the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500 is used as the rolling area depending on the gaming state, and the gaming area 1100 may give a narrow impression. When an effect using 2117, 2144, and 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) is executed, the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500, that is, the entire game area 1100 is used, and a spacious game is performed. Can give an impression of what is being done.

  Further, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are all arranged at the peripheral portion of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player (position close to the inner periphery of the game area 1100). In the period when the effect using the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) is not executed, it plays a role as a decoration part (for example, light-emitting decoration) of the game area 1100. . In this way, since the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 also serve as the decoration part of the game area 1100, the area for arranging the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 is the decoration part. There is no need to provide them separately, and it is possible to secure a sufficient rolling area where the game ball can roll while the area of the gaming area 1100 is limited.

  In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212) are all located below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the peripheral portion of the game area 1100 (game). Is displayed at least on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player operates to detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. Any position that does not hinder the viewing of the rendered effect image may be used. Further, not only the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also a start port for determining whether or not a game ball will win (a region around the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and information display related to other effects (for the player) (For example, information display that can be useful information) (for example, front right middle effect unit 2600, front right outer effect unit 2700, back upper effect unit 3300, back lower effect unit 3500, etc.) are provided at the periphery of the game area. Even if the player is operating so that any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 detects even a decoration area (such as a lamp) is not included. It is desirable that the position does not hinder.

  Next, a specific example of the continuous destruction effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. In this effect example, in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process processed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, “pseudo continuous variation” is performed before the reach effect is executed. A variation pattern that is set to execute a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times temporary stop display that does not become a reach mode) is determined (a variation pattern that does not perform pseudo continuous variation) In the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the case where it is determined to execute the continuous destruction effect is Show.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (A), in the continuous destruction effect that is executed after the decorative symbol variation display is started, an instruction “touch the sensor to attack the enemy!” Is displayed above the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, three enemy characters are displayed side by side in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, any number from 1 to 3 is assigned to the front of each of the three enemy characters, and an instruction is given as to which order to defeat the three enemy characters (in this example, The enemy character → the order of the left enemy character → the right enemy character is instructed). In this example, the enemy character is displayed so as to be larger as the enemy character is in the earlier order among the three enemy characters, so that it is easy to recognize in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated. ing.

  Further, in the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as the member displays 1900a to 1900c in which each of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 is copied, a left-pointing arrow corresponding to the left guide decoration member 2213 in order from the left. Left member display 1900a on which is drawn, a middle member display 1900b in which a downward arrow is drawn corresponding to the middle guide decoration member 2117, and a right member display 1900c on which a right arrow is drawn corresponding to the right guide decoration member 2144 Is displayed. These member displays 1900a to 1900c are displayed below each of the three enemy characters. In order to defeat the three enemy characters in the designated order, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 It is instructed which one to operate. That is, in this example, it is instructed to defeat the enemy character in the order of the middle enemy character → the left enemy character → the right enemy character, and correspondingly, the middle guide decorative member 2117 → the left guide decorative member It is possible to recognize that the player should touch in the order of 2213 → right guiding decorative member 2144. However, in this example, the player is required to touch in the order of the middle guiding decorative member 2117 → the left guiding decorative member 2213 → the right guiding decorative member 2144, but the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 It may be requested that the player touches in any order. As described above, the game area 1100 is changed by changing the order instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the order of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 to be touched by the player each time the continuous destruction effect is executed. The trajectory drawn by the player's hand changes, and the continuous destruction effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 can be made an effect that does not get bored.

  Further, the remaining time of the valid time permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is displayed slightly below the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this example, the effective time starts, and first, only the detection by the middle object detection sensor 2116 out of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, and only the middle member display 1900b displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is predetermined. And the middle guide decoration member 2117 corresponding to the middle member display 1900b is lit in the same color, thereby instructing the player to touch the middle guide decoration member 2117. In this example, the effective time is set to 5 seconds, and it is required to touch the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 that are separated from each other in a short time. Thus, the remaining time of the valid time is clearly shown on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the time limit for completing the touch of the player on the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 must be completed. Can be recognized reliably.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (B), when the player touches the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the middle object detection sensor 2116 detects it, the number 1 assigned to the enemy character inside is erased. By attacking the enemy character inside and displaying the characters “HIT!”, It is possible to reliably recognize that the middle object detection sensor 2116 has detected the player's hand. Then, only the detection by the left object detection sensor 2212 among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, and only the left member display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color, and the left member display 1900a. The player is instructed to touch the left guide decorative member 2213 by lighting only the left guide decorative member 2213 corresponding to the same color.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (C), when the player touches the left guide decoration member 2213 and the left object detection sensor 2212 detects the number, the second number assigned to the left enemy character is erased. By attacking the left enemy character and displaying the characters “HIT!”, It is possible to reliably recognize that the left object detection sensor 2212 has detected the player's hand. Then, only the detection by the right object detection sensor 2143 among the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is permitted, and only the right member display 1900c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit in a predetermined color and the right member display 1900c. The player is instructed to touch the right guide decorative member 2144 by lighting only the right guide decorative member 2144 corresponding to the same color.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (D), when the player touches the right guiding decorative member 2144 and the right object detection sensor 2143 detects the number, the number 3 assigned to the right enemy character is deleted. By attacking the right enemy character and displaying the characters “HIT!”, It is possible to reliably recognize that the right object detection sensor 2143 has detected the player's hand. Then, after attacking all three enemy characters, the effective time allowed to be detected by the press detection sensor 432c is started, and the detection of the detection by the press detection sensor 432c is started. In addition, as shown in FIG. 204 (E), the characters “Blow away!” Are displayed at the approximate center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and an image imitating the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed. The player is instructed to operate the operation unit 405.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an explosion occurs in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and detects the pressing detection sensor 432c within the effective period of the pressing detection sensor 432c. If it happens and three enemy characters can be defeated, it is determined that the continuous destruction effect has been successful. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (G), the decorative symbol variation display is a combination of the decorative symbols that continue the pseudo continuous variation in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol (in this example, “ The temporary continuous change is continued by displaying the temporary stop so as to be the temporary stop symbol of “7. That is, when three enemy characters can be defeated, it can be recognized that the continuous destruction effect is successful and the pseudo continuous variation is continued. In the present example, as a combination of decorative symbols that continue to undergo pseudo continuous variation, the left and right decorative symbols are out-of-line symbols that do not become the reach mode, and the middle decorative symbol is a symbol that is drawn as “pseudo-continuous”. When the pseudo continuous variation is continued, the decorative symbol variation display is started again, and the continuous destruction effect as shown in FIGS. 203 and 204 is executed again.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204 (H), within the effective period of the press detection sensor 432c, after the player operates the press operation portion 405 and the press detection sensor 432c detects it, within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the explosion does not occur and the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is determined that the continuous destruction effect has failed. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (I), the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped so as to form a reach form (in this example, a “7” reach symbol) in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol. By displaying, a reach effect is executed after that. That is, when the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, the continuous destruction effect fails, and it can be recognized that the pseudo continuous variation is not continued as in the case of the success of the continuous destruction effect.

  In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are adjacent to the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212, and are spaced apart from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be viewed by the player. In order to execute the continuous destruction effect, the player is allowed to touch the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 sequentially as instructed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the separated position is determined by the player. The hand of the player must move, and a dynamic action can be performed in the game area 1100. Further, by using the game area 1100 as an area for the player to operate, not only the game ball rolls or displays an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but the wide area of the game area 1100 is effectively used. It is possible to make use of the game for the player and to give the player a sense of unity with the game.

  Further, in this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are arranged at positions separated from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and each of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. It is provided adjacent to. For example, if only the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided in the game area 1100, the positions detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 cannot be clearly recognized. By providing the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, it is possible to clearly recognize where the player touches the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. For this reason, the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided at spaced positions on the front surface of the game area 1100, and the player does not hesitate where to touch and executes the continuous destruction effect. At this time, the player can quickly touch so that the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 detect in order. Therefore, in the continuous destruction effect, the remaining effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set short (in this example, 5 seconds). ), It is possible to complete the touch on the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the effective time without panicking the player.

  Further, in this example, not only is it indicated which of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 should be touched on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, but the indicated guide decoration member 2117 is indicated. , 2144 and 221 are lit only, so that the player can touch quickly without being confused with the guide decoration members 2117, 2144 and 221 to be touched.

  Further, in this example, optical sensors are used as the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. Through the transparent glass unit 590 that enables the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player It is detected whether the hand has touched the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. The detection ranges of these object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 can be detected not only in the front area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 but also in the area around the front area. The player does not necessarily need to touch the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 through the transparent glass unit 590, and passes through an area including the front area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 (game with the glass unit 590). Even if the person's hand is slightly separated), it can be detected. That is, it is possible to detect the player's hand in a wider range than the area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 while allowing the player to clearly recognize the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. . For this reason, even when the player operates the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 quickly, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 can detect them even if they are ambiguously operated. Therefore, in the continuous destruction effect, the remaining effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set short (in this example, 5 seconds). ), It is possible to complete the touch on the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the effective time without panicking the player.

  If an operation unit that can be directly operated by a player, such as the pressing operation unit 405, is provided on the game area 1100, vibrations when the player operates (presses) the game. It is transmitted to the area 1100 and may affect the rolling of the game ball on the game area 1100, but by using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 and the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, the player can directly There is no need to operate manually, and such problems do not occur.

  Further, in this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100 that is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the pressing operation unit 405 has the game window. Of the dish unit 300 having an upper dish 301 that protrudes forward to the lower side of 101 and stores a game ball, it is provided at the upper center that forms a vertical plane with the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In other words, the object to be touched by the player in the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the player in the pressing operation unit 405 should operate. The object forms a vertical plane with the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when a plurality of pressing operation units are provided on the dish unit 300, the player who has viewed the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces down to recognize the pressing operation unit to be operated by the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the contents of the effect displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be overlooked. On the other hand, when the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100, the player who was viewing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not face down and touches the player. The guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 to be recognized can be recognized, and the contents of effects displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are not missed. Note that the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided closer to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 than the pressing operation unit 405, and the player is more rendered (displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900). You can make you feel like you are participating in the production.

  Further, in this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100, that is, in an area where the player can see the screen while viewing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the other hand, the pressing operation unit 405 is provided on the dish unit 300, that is, in an area where it is difficult to enter the player's field of view while viewing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are not only on the game area 1100 as areas that can enter the player's field of view while visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided in an area on the game board 4 that is visible from the player side through the game window 101 formed in the door frame 5 (an area other than the game area 1100 in the game board 4), or lower than the lower end of the game area 1100. If it is above, it may be provided on the side of the door frame base body 110 that is the periphery of the gaming area 1100.

  Further, in this example, the player does not touch all of the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 within the effective time permitted to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212. If all of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 have not been detected, or the player does not touch the last designated guide decoration member among the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, 3 When only one or two of the two object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are detected, the three enemy characters are not attacked. In such a case, after the effective time (in this example, 5 seconds) is over, as shown in FIG. 204 (E), the player is instructed to operate the pressing operation unit 405, and three enemies are operated. An effect similar to that after attacking all of the characters is executed.

  Further, in this example, if the player does not operate the pressing operation unit 405 within the effective time permitted to be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c and the pressing detection sensor 432c does not detect, the pressing Whether or not three enemy characters can be defeated based on the fact that an explosion occurs in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the detection sensor 432c ends within the effective period, that is, whether or not the continuous destruction effect is successful. Can be judged. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the quasi-continuous fluctuation continues until after the end of the pressing detection sensor 432c within the effective period, and the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 (continuous destruction effect). To join).

  In addition, “pseudo continuous variation” in this example is similar to “normal variation” (variation in which a stop symbol is displayed without a reach mode), and all the decorative symbols are displayed in a variation mode of the decorative symbol. A temporary stop display (for example, a state in which the decoration pattern is drawn as “pseudo-ream” in this example) is not temporarily stopped (for example, a state in which the stop is not stopped completely by shaking up and down: a fluctuation change display) ) After that, the display of the decorative symbols is started again, and the display is temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-reachable pattern that does not become the reach mode continuously (repeatedly) a predetermined number of times (the number of times set in the variation pattern). In addition, as long as a temporary stop display is performed with a symbol that does not become a reach mode in the decorative symbol display, the decorative symbol variable display is started again. On the other hand, when the reach mode is formed, a reach effect ( The reach production set in the variation pattern) is executed. Further, in this example, “pseudo continuous variation” is performed before the reach effect is performed, but in “pseudo continuous variation”, the detachable symbols that do not become the reach mode are any one of 1 to 3 times. Only temporary stop can be displayed.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table referred to in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo continuous variation” does not become a reach mode. A variation pattern for temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol by any number of times 1 to 3 is set. In the variation pattern table, when executing “pseudo continuous variation”, the larger the number of temporary stop display that does not become the reach mode, the greater the expected value of jackpot expectation (expected rate of jackpot expectation = appearance rate at the time of jackpot / total appearance) The determination value is assigned to the variation pattern so that the rate is high. That is, when the determination result is a big hit, when executing “pseudo continuous variation”, the number of times that the determination result does not become the reach mode at a higher rate than the time when the determination result is out is displayed temporarily. For this reason, when the “pseudo continuous variation” is executed, the higher the number of times of temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol that does not become the reach mode, the higher the ratio of the determination result to the big hit, and the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state Has come to increase.

  In this example, when the variation pattern of “pseudo continuous variation” is determined in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process processed by the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100. Then, a variation pattern command capable of specifying the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. In the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, when the variation pattern of “pseudo continuous variation” is specified from the variation pattern command, the continuous destruction effect is performed based on the variation pattern. If it is decided whether or not to execute, and it is decided to execute the continuous destruction effect, the continuous destruction effect succeeds according to the number of temporary stop display that does not become the reach aspect in “pseudo continuous variation” Decide how many times For example, in the case of temporarily stopping display of the off symbol that does not become the reach mode in “pseudo continuous variation” only three times, the continuous destruction effect is succeeded only three times. In addition, when “pseudo continuous variation” is executed, the judgment result becomes a big hit as the number of times of temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol that does not become the reach mode is executed, that is, as the number of successes of the continuous destruction effect increases. The ratio is high. For this reason, in the continuous destruction effect, it is desired that the effect is successful and the “pseudo continuous variation” is continued, and the player touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 or operates the pressing operation unit 405 by the player. To participate in the continuous defeat production.

  In addition, in this example, not only when a variation pattern that executes “pseudo continuous variation” is determined, but also when a variation pattern that does not execute “pseudo continuous variation” is determined, continuous destruction effects are performed based on the variation pattern. It may be determined whether or not to execute. At this time, even if it is determined that the continuous destruction effect is to be executed, the detachable pattern that does not become the reach mode like “pseudo continuous variation” is not displayed temporarily, so that it fails in the first continuous destruction effect. It has become.

  Further, in this example, when “pseudo continuous variation” is executed, an out-of-order symbol that does not become a reach mode (in this example, a temporary stop symbol of “7, pseudo-continuous, 8”) is temporarily stopped. The same temporary stop symbol is repeatedly displayed in a temporary stop regardless of the number of temporary stop displays of the out-of-order symbols that do not become the reach mode in “continuous fluctuation”. In addition, the left decoration symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo continuous variation” is a reach-like symbol (in this example, “7” reach symbol) that is formed after the “pseudo continuous variation” is executed. It is controlled to become. That is, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, first, after determining the stop symbol of the decorative pattern based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control board 4100, When a variation pattern of “pseudo continuous variation” is specified from the variation pattern command, the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in “pseudo continuous variation” is the first stop among the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbol. The right decorative design is determined to be the same as the displayed left decorative design, and the right decorative design displayed temporarily after the left decorative design in "Pseudo Continuous Variation" is different from the temporary stopped design of the left decorative design. The symbol is determined to be the symbol (in this example, the left ornament symbol + 1 symbol), and the middle ornament symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the “pseudo continuous variation” is drawn as “pseudo-continuous”. It is adapted to determine to be a symbol.

  Further, in this example, when the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo continuous variation” is determined, the player touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 in order, and then the player operates the pressing operation unit 405. However, it is possible to execute a continuous destruction effect using only one of them, and the game is applied to the guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213 as instructed in the continuous destruction effect. When the player sequentially touches or when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous destruction effect is successful and to recognize whether or not the pseudo continuous variation is continued. Good.

  In this example, in addition to the continuous destruction effect, an effect using the press operation unit 405 is executed, and the press operation unit 405 is used at a higher rate than the effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. The production is executed. For example, in the “normal fluctuation” (the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative pattern to the stop display of the decorative pattern as to whether or not to form the reach mode) before executing the reach effect, the liquid crystal display device “Box” is displayed on the screen of 1900 and the player is instructed to operate the pressing operation unit 405. At this time, the effective time permitted to be detected by the press detection sensor 432c is started, and the detection of the detection by the press detection sensor 432c is started. When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and detects the pressing detection sensor 432c within the effective period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, the character A is displayed from the “box” displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect in which any one of -C appears is executed. In such an effect, the character to appear is determined so that the big hit expectation degree (hit big hit expectation = appearance rate at the big hit / total appearance rate) increases in the order of character A → character B → character C. For example, when the character C appears, the ratio that the determination result is a big hit is high, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

[9. Effects of this embodiment]
As mainly described in [6-1] to [6-3], in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an effect pattern including a specific winning effect (specific effect) appears in an outlier manner. The result of this game is stored (recording of the battle history), and thereafter, the game effect is performed while teaching the record of the battle history, and an effect pattern including the winning effect is selected from a plurality of effect patterns. By changing, it is possible to easily select an effect pattern including the specific winning effect when a big win is won in subsequent games. Therefore, even if a specific winning effect does not become a big hit, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit will be increased when the specific winning effect appears next time in the next game. A decrease in game willingness can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3], in a state where a record of a battle history related to a specific winning effect is recorded, a specific winning is made. When an effect is presented, the degree of expectation for an advantageous game with a high advantage (ie, high hit) among the advantageous games with different degrees of advantage (low hit and high hit) is increased. Specifically, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach as a specific winning effect, and the allocation destination of the winning effect is changed (war history). (See, for example, the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186), the number of battle A reach distributions in the high hit pattern will increase in subsequent games. Therefore, the expectation for high hit is expected when the battle A reach is revealed. The degree (reliability) is increased.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning effect is displayed using the distribution table 1A and the distributing table 1B of FIG. 186, so that the specific winning effect after the transition of the battle history related to the specific winning effect. Can be raised, the player's expectation for a highly advantageous game (high hit) can be increased. And (even if the specific winning effect is an effect in which the expectation for the big hit (or high hit) is not relatively high in the initial state) When the winning effect is revealed, the expectation for the high hit can be increased, and therefore, the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered with respect to the appearance of the specific winning effect.

  In addition, when the player is provided with a teaching based on the record of the outage due to the specific winning effect (record of the battle history), when the specific winning effect is reappeared, the big hit (especially the high win) This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning performance with a high expectation of the player is being performed, making it easier to enhance the player's interest. Furthermore, since such teachings suggest the existence of a winning effect that increases the reliability when it is revealed, the player should desire a specific winning effect to appear stronger than usual. Can be expected, and can provide new fun in gaming.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation level of a specific winning effect is changed according to the game situation by changing the allocation related to the winning effect of the winning pattern (particularly the high winning pattern) as described above. Therefore, even if the reliability of the “specific winning effect” is relatively low at the time of initial setting, and the reach effect is low reliability, the expectation level when the specific winning effect appears again is higher than before. It can be expected to increase the player's expectation. In the first place, in the conventional gaming machine, the low-reliability reach production is a win-winning production that has a relatively high opportunity to occur than the other-reliability reach production. Although there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play will be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment appears as a specific winning effect in spite of such a low-reliability reach effect. When this is done, it is not a low reliability but a winning performance with an increased reliability, so not only the above-mentioned decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed, but also a big hit (especially a high hit) expectation It has a special effect of creating a feeling.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [6-4-1], the record and teaching of the battle history is based on the fact that the “specific effect” appears in an out-of-phase manner. When a variation pattern that is different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a “specific production” to appear is selected by performing a transition of the battle history with respect to the allocation of the winning performance to be executed. Also, a “specific production” can appear.

  To explain with a specific example, if the battle A reach is a “specific production”, the “predetermined fluctuation pattern that can make a“ specific production ”appear” has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds that can make the battle A reach appear. It is a special symbol variation pattern, and the “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an out-of-phase manner, and the selected battle history is set to “war history Q” or “war history R” in the distribution table 2A of FIG. By changing (transition of the battle history), the “alternative effect” related to the battle A reach at the time of the big hit, that is, the amount of distribution to the long battle B ′ reach and the long battle C ′ reach at the time of the big hit. Then, after such a battle history transition is made, if a special lottery result is obtained in a special lottery and a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the “alternative effect” in which the distribution amount is increased. By increasing the ratio at which “I” is selected and causing the “alternative effect” to appear, it is possible to cause the battle A reach effect (ie, “specific effect”) to appear during the effect.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to a specific performance, when a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, an alternative performance is generated using the distribution table 2A of FIG. Because it is easy to appear and the specific performance is displayed, when a specific performance appears when the history of the battle related to the specific performance is performed, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased. be able to. Such an effect can be applied even if a specific performance is a low-reliability production where the expectation to the big hit is not relatively high in the initial setting, and such a low-reliability production appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the interest of the player may be reduced when the game is played.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193 is used, an alternate effect in the big hit pattern (low hit pattern and high hit pattern) in each battle history (war history Q, R) to be transferred. Although the number of distributions has been increased, the number of distributions of alternative effects in the shifted pattern is also set to a degree smaller than the number of distributions of the big hit pattern. In this way, by preparing a distribution with a shift pattern, even if a specific effect (Battle A reach effect) appears as an alternative effect, there is a possibility that it will not lead to a big hit with a low probability. It can be expected that the player will not get bored until the final stop mode is determined. It is not always necessary to distribute the substitute effect with such a dislocation pattern. By not performing the assignment, a specific effect appears in the substitute effect when the history of the battle is memorized and taught. It is good also as a special winning effect in which the big hit is fixed at the time of being played.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-2], the record and teaching of the battle history is based on the fact that the “specific effect” appears in an outlier manner. When a variation pattern that is different from a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a “specific production” to appear is selected by performing a transition of the battle history with respect to the allocation of the winning performance to be executed. Also, a “specific production” can appear.

  To explain with a specific example, if the battle A reach is a “specific production”, the “predetermined fluctuation pattern that can make a“ specific production ”appear” has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds that can make the battle A reach appear. It is a special symbol variation pattern, and the “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern” is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an out-of-phase manner, and the battle history of the selected destination is changed to “war history Q” or “war history R” in the distribution table 2B of FIG. By changing (transition of battle history), the “alternative effect” regarding the battle A reach at the time of high hit, that is, the amount of distribution to the long battle B ′ reach and the long battle C ′ reach at the time of high hit. If a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected after the result of such a battle history transition is made and a result of advantageous game (high hit) is obtained in a special lottery, Since the ratio of selecting the “alternative effect” with the increased amount increases, by causing the “alternative effect” to appear, an effect of battle A reach (that is, a “specific effect”) is produced in the middle of the effect. You can make it appear.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to a specific performance, when the special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the alternate production is performed using the distribution table 2B of FIG. Since it is easy to appear and the specific performance is displayed, when a specific performance appears and the game shifts to a big hit game when the memory of the battle history related to the specific performance is performed, The expectation that it is a high hit can be raised. That is, when a specific performance appears when the battle history is being memorized, the player can have a sense of expectation for high hits. Such an effect can be applied even if a specific performance is a low-reliability production where the expectation to the big hit is not relatively high in the initial setting, and such a low-reliability production appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the interest of the player may be reduced when the game is played.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 is used, in each battle history to be transferred (war history Q, R), it is low to a degree lower than the allocation number of the substitute effect in the high hit pattern. Although the allocation number of the alternative effect in the hit pattern and the off pattern is set, the allocation of the alternative effect in the low hit pattern and the out pattern may not necessarily be set. For example, if you do not distribute the alternative production in the outlier pattern, it will be confirmed that it will be a big hit when the specific production appears in the alternative production when the history of the battle is memorized and taught, Furthermore, it is possible to realize a special performance with a high probability that the big hit is a high hit. In addition, if there is no allocation of substitute effects in the low hit pattern, there is no possibility of a low hit when a specific effect appears in the substitute effect when the history of the battle is memorized and taught. If you win, you can achieve a big win. In addition, if neither the off-line pattern nor the low-hit pattern is assigned to the substitute effect, the high hit is given when a specific effect appears in the substitute effect when the history of the battle is memorized and taught. It is possible to realize a special production that is fixed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the battle history is recorded in any of the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186, the distribution table 1B in FIG. 188, the distribution table 2A in FIG. 193, and the distribution table 2B in FIG. The transition of the battle history is performed based on this, but after such a transition of the battle history, the expectation for the big hit or the high hit when the specific performance (winning performance) appears, the battle history is increased. The higher the transition, the higher the expectations. Therefore, for example, when the battle A reach is a specific performance, the battle history is recorded while the player has a disappointing feeling that he / she did not get a big hit, so that the battle A reach appears out of the way. Therefore, the expectation that the battle A reach will appear in the subsequent games is increased. And, when a big hit is obtained by the appearance of Battle A reach (or the appearance of Battle A reach by alternative production), the player feels a sense of accomplishment that can wipe out the background of the failure due to the previous Battle A reach In addition, when the sorting tables 1A, 1B, and 2B are used, since the expectation that such a big hit is a high hit is high, it is possible to give a player a greater sense of achievement. it can.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific effect that can be displayed by the “alternative effect” that can be executed when the record of the battle history related to the specific effect is being performed. Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern is selected, a specific performance based on the record of the battle history can be alternatively displayed. In addition, each time the battle history shifts, it has a feature that the degree of expectation for big hit (or high hit) is increased. According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment as described above, a specific effect (for example, battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history is displayed in the original display time (the battle A effect is 22 seconds. The battle A reach as a whole is also 30 seconds. ) Even if a display time longer than (for example, 60 seconds) is selected, the specific effect can be displayed by the alternative effect. In general, the longer the display time, the more likely the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit (or high hit) tends to increase, so a specific display time is longer than the original display time. By making the production appear, it is possible to expect an effect that makes the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special effects described in [6-5-1] to [6-5-4] depending on each production pattern (first to fourth production patterns) of alternative productions. Each of these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) has a game medium launched toward the gaming area passing through the predetermined area. This is an example of a lottery means for drawing a lottery result from among a plurality of types of lottery results including at least an advantageous game having a different degree of advantage and a difference. The predetermined area corresponds to, for example, the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of an effect display unit that can display an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery unit. Also, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control RAM 4140e) has a specific effect when the lottery result of the advantageous game is not obtained despite the fact that the lottery means has been performed. It is an example of effect storage means that can memorize that the specific effect has appeared based on the appearance on the effect display means. As a specific processing example, an SP2 type battle A reach is shown. This corresponds to the case where the peripheral control MPU 4140a records the battle history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e when the (specific effect) is executed in the off mode. Also, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly peripheral control MPU 4140a, liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and VDP 4150c) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 are an example of information teaching means for teaching information related to the specific effect stored in the effect storage means. The information related to the specific performance corresponds to, for example, “image data or the like used for teaching the battle history” stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b or the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. A specific teaching example is the display in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) is memorized by the effect storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means is an advantageous game with a high degree of advantage among the advantageous games. In this case, an example of a special effect control means capable of causing the special effect to appear in a form including the specific effect even if a variation time during which the special effect longer than the specific effect can appear is selected. In the display period of the special effect, the specific effect execution means for causing the specific display to appear on the effect display means, and between the specific effects appearing by the specific effect execution means, It is an example of an interrupt effect execution means for causing the effect display means to display a related effect related to the specific effect. Here, the “special effect” corresponds to an alternative effect by the second effect pattern, and the specific effect displayed by the specific effect executing means is the battle A1 in FIGS. 200 (A) and 200 (B). ~ Corresponding to battle A4 and the related effects appearing by the interrupt effect executing means correspond to the cut-in (or cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) in Figs. 200 (A) and 200 (B). In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) can display the specific effect when the special effect control unit can cause the specific effect to appear, so that the specific storage is performed. This is an example of higher reward expectation means that can increase the expectation that an advantageous game to be transferred is an advantageous game with a high degree of advantage when an effect is displayed and the advantageous game is shifted to the advantageous game. Specifically, when the record of the battle history related to the battle A performance is being performed, the winning pattern is won with the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds instead of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds that can make the battle A reach appear. In this case, it is easy to select a special production, that is, “alternative production (long battle B ′ reach or long battle C ′ reach)” depending on the distribution by the battle history Q or the battle history R of the distribution table 2B. When a battle history recording related to a battle A effect is being performed, if a battle A effect (specific effect) appears and the game shifts to a jackpot game, this corresponds to a high expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit. .

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1150 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2600 Front right middle production unit 2601 Support pin 2610 Front right middle movable ornament 2620A Fixed Decorative body 2623 Shading member 2623a Partition piece 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Production sheet (pattern film, smoke sheet)
2626a Black part (pattern film)
2626b Blue part (pattern film)
2626c Red part (pattern film)
2626d Uncolored part (smoked sheet)
2627 Diffuse lens sheet 2628 Holding member 2640 Front right middle decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU
4140 Peripheral control unit 4140a Peripheral control MPU
4140b Peripheral control ROM
4140e Peripheral control RAM
4150 Liquid crystal control unit 4150a Liquid crystal control MPU
4150c VDP

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a winning determination means for determining a hit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect determination means for determining an effect based on the determination by the winning determination means. And an effect display means for displaying the effect, and after changing the symbol, the game is played once by stopping the symbol. There is a special effect that can be displayed on the effect display means across the variation, and a specific effect that increases the expectation for the hit, and when the special effect is displayed across a plurality of the variations, When the specific effect is displayed, the expectation for the hit is increased compared to when the specific effect is displayed when the special effect is not displayed. Is displayable with the special effect to be the output display means is provided with a plurality of special effect, wherein the special effect is a game which is characterized in that it is capable terminated in the game to derive the result of the per Machine .

Claims (1)

A lottery means for drawing a lottery result among a plurality of types of lottery results including at least an advantageous game with a different degree of advantage and a difference based on the fact that a game medium launched toward the game area passes through a predetermined area When,
Production display means capable of displaying production based on the lottery result by the lottery means;
Based on the fact that the specific effect appears on the effect display means when the lottery result of the advantageous game is not obtained despite the fact that the lottery means has been performed, the specific effect is displayed. Production storage means that can memorize that was issued,
Information teaching means for teaching information related to the specific effect stored in the effect storage means;
When the storage by the effect storage means is being performed, even if a variable time that allows the appearance of a special effect longer than the specific effect is selected, the special effect is included in the aspect including the specific effect. Special production control means that can appear,
With
The special effect control means is
A specific effect execution means for causing the specific effect to appear on the effect display means within a display period of the special effect;
Interruption effect executing means for causing the effect display means to display a related effect related to the specific effect between the specific effects appearing by the specific effect executing means;
In addition,
When the specific effect can appear by the special effect control means, when the specific effect appears and the advantageous game shifts to when the memory by the effect storage means is performed, An upper reward expectation means that can increase the expectation that the advantageous game to be transferred is an advantageous game with a high degree of advantage, and
A gaming machine comprising: